JP4713507B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, the present invention relates to a start detection means for detecting a game medium in a start area provided in the game area, and the detection of the game medium by the start detection means. Based on a variable winning device that performs a starting operation that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific region among a plurality of regions provided in the variable winning device Corresponding to the fact that the specific detection means detects the game medium that has entered the variable winning device that has entered the first state in the starting operation. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the user.

  Based on the detection of a game ball as a game medium in a start area (start prize opening or start opening) provided in the game area, the big prize opening is opened by an opening / closing member (so-called blade member), and a big prize is awarded. 2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines are known that enter a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) when a V-winning occurs when a gaming ball that has entered the mouth enters a specific area (V zone) in a variable winning device.

As this type of pachinko gaming machine, the driving pattern of the rotator is selected from a plurality of types according to the position of the game ball entering the guide provided on the rotator installed in the variable winning device. Have been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). In this technique, when the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, data for rotating the rotating body at a normal speed is set, and control is performed so that the rotating body always rotates.
JP 2005-52464 A

In addition, when there is a winning at the starting port as the starting area, the variable winning device is operated by operating the movable members in the variable winning device such as a ball sorting member, a ball stopping member, and a ball path changing member according to a predetermined pattern. There has also been proposed a technique that can guide a game ball that has entered into a specific area (for example, Patent Document 2). In this technique, a disk-shaped rotating body that is rotated in one direction by a motor is provided as a ball distribution member, and this rotating body is rotated at a constant rotational speed as an operating state when power is turned on.
JP 2005-270584 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, since the rotating body is always rotated, power consumption increases. Even in the technique described in Patent Document 2, since the rotating body serving as the ball sorting member is rotated as an operating state when the power is turned on, the power consumption increases. In addition, when the movable member is operated based on winning in the starting area, the operation mode of the movable member repeats a certain operation, and the game is monotonous and it is difficult to improve the interest of the game. There is.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming enjoyment while preventing an increase in power consumption.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application has a game medium (for example, a game ball) in a start area (for example, the start area 56) provided in the game area (for example, the game area 41). ) And a first state advantageous to the player (for example, an open state) and a game based on the detection of the game medium by the start detection unit. A variable winning device (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 66) that performs a starting operation that changes to a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and a plurality of regions provided in the variable winning device Specific detection means (for example, the first specific ball detector 121a and the second specific ball detector 12) for detecting a game medium that has entered a specific area (for example, the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91). b) and the like, and it is more advantageous for the player in response to the fact that the specific detection means has detected the game medium that has entered the variable winning device that has entered the first state by the starting operation. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a plurality of types that can be identified based on the detection of the gaming medium by the start detection means First variable display means (for example, special symbol display device 44a, etc.) for variably displaying the first identification information (for example, special symbol), and a variable display result for the first identification information as a specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) Etc.) and a predetermined display result (for example, a small hit symbol), for example, a first display result determining means (for example, the CPU 112 determines in step S203) In response to the variable display result of the first identification information being the predetermined display result (for example, the CPU 112 performs the start operation in step S227). Based on the determination, after executing the process of step S232, the portion for executing the small hit release process of step S113) and the variable display result of the first identification information corresponds to the specific display result. Thus, the specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state regardless of whether or not the game medium has entered the specific area (for example, after the CPU 112 executes the process of step S226 based on the determination of Yes in step S221). , A portion for executing the processing of steps S114 to S117) and the specific operation in the specific gaming state , A specific operation that allows the variable winning device different from the variable winning device to be changed to the second state after changing from the second state to the first state, and to continue to the predetermined maximum number of times. Corresponding to the determination result in the process of step S203 or the determination result in the process of step S524, the process of steps S114 to S117 is performed based on the setting of the round control pattern in the process of steps S222, S525, and S528. Each of which is different from the first identification information based on the fact that a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the gate switch 58a has detected a game ball passing through the passing gate 58). A second variable table that variably displays a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, ordinary symbols and decorative symbols). Means (for example, the normal symbol display device 63 and the effect display device 44b), the variable display result of the second identification information, the first display result (for example, per first common symbol) and the second display result (for example, the second display). Second display result determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 112 executes the process of step S356) and the second display result determination means determine the first display result determination means including any one of a plurality of display results including Individual effect executing means for executing effects corresponding to variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means in different effect modes depending on whether one display result or the second display result is determined ( For example, the CPU 181 of the production control microcomputer 170 corresponds to the normal pattern variation pattern determined by the CPU 112 in the process of step S358. Based on the determination result in the processing of S703 and the determination results in the processing of steps S705 and S706, etc., a portion for executing the decorative symbol variable display processing in step S162) and the variable display result of the second identification information are the first display. Corresponding to the result, the game medium can be guided to the starting area by the first guiding operation advantageous to the player, while the variable display result of the second identification information becomes the second display result. In response to this, the guidance control means (for example, the CPU 112 in the processing of steps S372 and S374 allows the game medium to be guided to the starting area by the second guidance operation that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first guidance operation. Corresponding to the setting of the electric operation pattern, the portion for executing the ordinary electric accessory operation processing in step S144) and the variable prize apparatus are provided. A movable member (for example, a rotating body 79 or a sorting member 83) that operates in a predetermined operation mode from a predetermined initial position so that the game medium that has entered the variable prize device can be guided to the specific area; The movable member control means for controlling the movement of the movable member in response to the movement (for example, the part where the CPU 112 executes the processing of steps S245 to S248, S253 and S254, S257 and S258, S264 to S266, or the initial motor of step S24) A portion for executing a position return control process), variable winning detection means (for example, the first count switch 106) for detecting a gaming medium that has entered the variable winning device, and gaming media discharged from the variable winning device. A discharge detection means for detecting (for example, a discharge ball detector 122), detection by the variable winning detection means, and the discharge Medium presence determination means for determining whether or not a game medium is present in the variable winning device based on detection by the payout means (for example, a portion where the CPU 112 executes the process of step S262), and the movable member In response to the start operation being started by the start control means, the control means is a movable member operation start means for starting the operation of the movable member (for example, a portion where the CPU 112 executes the processing of steps S245 to S248, etc. ), And the movable member operation starting means starts the movement of the movable member, and then the medium presence / absence determining means determines that there is no game medium in the variable winning device. The initial position return control means (for example, the CPU 112 executes step S) for executing the control to stop after returning to the predetermined initial position. 66. The start control means includes a predetermined operation waiting time (after a game medium is detected by the start detection means) (including a part for executing the motor initial position return control process in step S24). For example, the start standby control means for starting the start operation after the elapse of the start interval time (for example, the CPU 112 determines the special symbol change process in step S111 or the special symbol stop process in step S112 based on the determination in step S206). And the step of performing the process of step S243 based on the determination of Yes in the process of step S242), the predetermined operation waiting time is determined by the initial position return control means, and the movable member is Time required to return to the initial position (for example, the maximum required time is 5 seconds. In addition, as the first specific action in the specific gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of the first identification information becomes the specific display result, the variable winning device is changed from the second state. First specific operation control means for performing the operation to change to the second state after changing to the first state (for example, the round count value is “1” according to the setting of the round control pattern RP1-2 shown in FIG. 46). The CPU 112 executes the big hit release processing in step S115) and the first display result determination means determines whether the specific display result or the predetermined display result is determined. Common effect execution means (for example, C) that executes an effect corresponding to the variable winning device changing from the second state to the first state in a common effect mode. U181 is a portion that causes the effect display device 44b to display an effect image as shown in FIG. 47B in the small hit effect processing in step S168 and the big hit effect processing in step S169), and the first. Based on the determination of the specific display result by the display result determining means, the second specific action is performed after the first specific action in the specific gaming state is performed following the effect by the common effect executing means. The specific notification effect execution means for executing the effect of notifying that the player is in the specific gaming state during the period up to (for example, when the CPU 181 performs the big hit effect processing in step S169, the special figure display result becomes “second big hit”. When the first round game in the jackpot game state based on the fact is finished, the V winning success production as shown in FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B) is performed. That effect image or comprises an effect image in V winning failure game as shown in FIG. 48 (C) and (D), such as portions to be displayed in the effect display device 44b) and. Further, whether or not a game medium is detected by the variable winning detection means in a variable winning determination period other than a period from when the starting operation is started to when a predetermined effective detection period elapses after the starting operation ends. Correspondingly, it corresponds to the variable winning abnormality determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 112 executes the processing of steps S51 to S54) and the variable winning abnormality determining means determining that there is an abnormality. Then, abnormality occurrence notifying means for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, a portion where the CPU 112 executes the first abnormality notification process in step S56) may be provided. Alternatively, a variable winning detection means (for example, the second count switch 52) that detects a game medium that has entered the variable winning device, and the second state after the variable winning device is changed to the first state. In accordance with whether or not the game medium is detected by the variable winning detection means in a determination period other than a period until a predetermined effective detection time elapses after that, a variable winning abnormality determining means for determining whether there is an abnormality ( For example, an abnormality occurrence notifying unit (for example, CPU 112) for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in response to the fact that the CPU 112 determines that there is an abnormality by the variable prize abnormality determining unit and the like. For example, a portion for executing the second abnormality notification process of step S60). Alternatively, a period from the start of the first guiding operation or the second guiding operation capable of guiding the game medium to the start area by the guiding control means until a predetermined effective guiding time elapses after the guiding operation is ended. In a start determination period other than that, a start winning abnormality determining means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality corresponding to whether or not a game medium is detected by the start detecting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 112 executes steps S61 and S62) Etc.) and an abnormality occurrence notifying means for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, the part where the CPU 112 executes the third abnormality notifying process of step S64) in response to the determination that there is an abnormality by the start winning abnormality determining means. Etc.).
Here, the abnormality occurrence notifying means determines that the variable prize abnormality determining means determines that there is an abnormality, the variable winning abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality, and the start prize abnormality determining means indicates that there is an abnormality. Corresponding to each determined to be present, the occurrence of an abnormality may be notified in different notification modes (for example, the CPU 112 executes the first abnormality notification process in step S56 and is shown in FIG. 23A). The part for displaying the first abnormality notification screen, the part for the CPU 112 to execute the second abnormality notification process in step S60 to display the second abnormality notification screen shown in FIG. 23B, and the CPU 112 for the third abnormality in step S64. The part etc. which perform a alerting | reporting process and display the 3rd abnormality alerting | reporting screen shown in FIG.23 (C). Furthermore, it is determined that there is an abnormality by the variable prize abnormality determining means, that it is determined that there is an abnormality by the variable prize abnormality determining means, and that there is an abnormality by the starting prize abnormality determining means. Corresponding to each, it is provided with a payout restricting means for restricting payout of a prize game medium as a prize for the game medium for which the abnormality is determined (for example, a portion where the CPU 112 executes the processes of steps S55, S59, and S63). May be. In addition, after the specific game state is ended, special game state control means (for example, the CPU 112 performs a step of controlling the game medium into a special game state in which the game medium can easily enter the starting area as compared with the normal game state different from the specific game state. And the second identification in the second variable display means after being controlled to the special gaming state by the special gaming state control means after executing the processing of S312). Variable display count counting means for counting the number of times of variable display of information (for example, the portion where the CPU 112 executes the process of step S379 after executing the process of step S313) and the variable display counted by the variable display count counting means. In response to the number of times reaching a predetermined number, the special gaming state is terminated. Another gaming state ending means (e.g. CPU112 and portions for performing the process of step S381 by the determination of Yes in the processing of step S380) and may be provided. In addition, it is provided in a passage through which a game medium can enter in the game area, and a predetermined advance direction (for example, from the position of the variable guide member 61a shown in FIG. 2A to FIG. 2B) in the passage. In the direction toward the position of the variable guide member 61a shown in FIG. 49A or the direction from the position of the variable guide member 61a shown in FIG. 49A toward the position of the variable guide member 61a shown in FIG. By providing a movable member (for example, a variable guiding member 61a) that does not guide the game medium to the start area by not guiding the game medium to the start area while guiding the game medium to the start area, the guide The control means may cause the movable member to advance in the predetermined direction in the first guiding operation and the second guiding operation (for example, the CPU 112 executes the ordinary electric accessory operating process in step S144). Such as a portion of). Further, the first display result determining means is a predetermined display result determining means for determining the predetermined display result to be one of a plurality of predetermined types (for example, a special process as shown in FIG. By referring to the figure display result determination table 200, the display control type includes a portion for determining the display result type from “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, etc. A start control pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 112 executes the process of step S228) for determining one of a plurality of predetermined control patterns for the start operation in accordance with a predetermined display result determined by the result determining means. And the variable winning device is changed to the first state based on the control pattern determined by the start control pattern determining means. Starting operation executing means for (for example CPU112 according to the setting of Koatari control pattern set at step S228, such as portions for performing the Koatari open when the process of step S113) and may contain. The medium presence / absence determining means is a game medium that has entered the variable winning device that has been changed to the first state by the starting operation after the variable winning device has entered the second state by the end of the starting operation. May be determined after a sufficient time has elapsed until the variable winning detection means is detected (for example, the CPU 112 determines whether or not a game medium is present by determining Yes in step S261). A part for executing the processing of S262).

  3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the movable member control means is a predetermined operation control as the predetermined operation mode by the movable member in response to the start operation being started by the start control means. Until a time (for example, an advantageous distribution time or an advantageous rotation time) elapses, a first operation pattern (for example, the first distribution operation pattern or the first operation pattern) is likely to allow the game medium to enter the specific area through the movable member. After the operation control time elapses, the second operation pattern (for example, the second distribution operation pattern or the second operation pattern is difficult to allow the game medium to enter the specific area). On the basis of the settings of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 set by the CPU 112 in the process of step S228, for example, Step S245～S248, it includes a portion, and so on) that perform the processing of S253 and S254, S257 and S258.

  4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the movable member control means is a predetermined operation control as the predetermined operation mode by the movable member in response to the start operation being started by the start control means. Until the time elapses, the movable member is operated in a second operation pattern (for example, a second distribution operation pattern, a second rotation pattern, etc.) that makes it difficult for the game medium to enter the specific area, and the operation control is performed. An operation switching control means for operating the movable member with a first operation pattern (for example, a first distribution operation pattern, a first rotation pattern, etc.) that allows the game medium to easily enter the specific area after a lapse of time. (For example, based on the settings of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 set by the CPU 112 in the process of step S228, steps S245 to S248, S253, and 254 includes a portion, and so on) that perform the S257 and the processing of S258.

  5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the movable member is a turnable guide member (for example, a rotating body 79), and the operation switching control means sets the guide member to a predetermined value in the first operation pattern. In the second operation pattern, the guide member is rotated in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, indicated by an arrow A22 in FIG. 4). Rotate in the reverse direction.

  6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the movable member control means determines the operation control time to be one of a plurality of predetermined types corresponding to the predetermined display result determined by the display result determination means. Control time determining means (for example, a portion for determining the first distribution control time or the first rotation control time corresponding to the setting of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 set by the CPU 112 in the process of step S228). .

  7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the first display result and the second display result are obtained by the second display result determination means in a special game state that is advantageous to a player different from the specific game state. When one of the above is determined, variable display after the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means is started for a period during which the game control means can guide the game medium to the starting area. At least one of the period until the result is derived and displayed and the probability determined by the second display result determination means as either the first display result or the second display result is the specific gaming state and the Special guidance control means (for example, the CPU 112 executes the processes of steps S353 to S356 and S359, which are changed in comparison with the normal game state different from the special game state. Comprising minute and the portions, and so on) that perform the ordinary electric won game operation process of step S144 in accordance with the setting of the Hiroshiden operation pattern set in the processing in S372, S374.

In the gaming machine according to claim 7, the variable winning detection means for detecting the game medium that has entered the variable winning device, and the second state after the variable winning device is changed to the first state. In accordance with whether or not a game medium has been detected by the variable winning detection means in a determination period other than a period until a predetermined effective detection time elapses after the determination, the variable winning abnormality determining means for determining presence or absence of abnormality A game including abnormality occurrence notifying means for notifying occurrence of an abnormality and variable display of the first identification information by the first variable display means in response to the fact that there is an abnormality by the variable winning abnormality determining means; Process data storage for storing process data indicating which of a plurality of processes selectively executed in a predetermined order for controlling the progress of a game in the machine And the plurality of processes include a specific operation process that is executed according to the process data stored in the process data storage unit and causes the specific operation control unit to execute the specific operation, and the variation The winning abnormality determining means includes a specific action process determining means for determining whether or not the process data stored in the process data storage means is data indicating execution of the specified action process, and the specified action process determining means An abnormality determining means for determining a presence / absence of an abnormality by determining that it is the determination period when it is determined that the data does not indicate execution of the specific operation process.

  The present invention has the following effects.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the movable member operation starting means starts the operation of the movable member in response to the start operation being started by the start control means. Then, the initial position return control means is movable based on the fact that the medium presence determination means determines that no game medium is present in the variable winning device after the movement of the movable member is started by the movable member operation start means. The member is returned to a predetermined initial position and then stopped. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced compared with the case where a movable member is always operated.
Further, in response to the variable display result of the first identification information being a predetermined display result, the start control is executed by the start control means, and the variable winning device that has entered the first state by this start operation is entered. The game state is controlled to the specific game state in response to the game medium being detected by the specific detection means. On the other hand, in response to the variable display result of the first identification information being the specific display result, the specific game state control means sets the specific game state regardless of whether or not the game medium has entered the specific area. Be controlled. Here, the guidance control means enables the game medium to be guided to the starting area by the first guidance operation that is advantageous to the player in response to the variable display result of the second identification information being the first display result. Thus, in response to the variable display result of the second identification information being the second display result, the game medium can be guided to the starting area by the second guidance operation which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first guidance operation. . Then, the individual effect executing means varies the second identification information in the second variable display means with different effect modes depending on which of the first display result and the second display result is determined by the second display result determining means. An effect corresponding to the display is executed. Further, in the specific gaming state, the specific action for changing to the second state after changing the variable winning device different from the variable winning device from the second state to the first state by the specific action control means is a predetermined maximum. It can be continued up to the number of continuations. Thereby, the control to the specific game state can be performed in various game progresses, and the first guidance advantageous to the player according to the effect mode in the effect executed in response to the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the action to be performed and to improve the gaming interest.
Furthermore, the predetermined operation standby time for the start standby control means to start the start operation after the game medium is detected by the start detection means is the time required for the movable member to return to the predetermined initial position by the initial position return control means. It is also long. As a result, the movable member can always be operated from the predetermined initial position at the time when the grand prize opening is in the first state by the starting operation and the game medium can enter the variable winning device.
In addition, the first specific action control means changes the variable winning device from the second state to the first state as the first specific action in the specific gaming state based on the specific display result. As a result, even in the specific gaming state, the variable winning device changes to the first state in the same way as the start operation, while the specific gaming state continues and performs the next specific operation even if the game medium does not enter the specific area. This makes it possible to increase the unexpectedness of the game and improve the game interest.
In addition, the common effect executing means provides an effect corresponding to the variable winning device changing from the second state to the first state in a common effect mode when either the specific display result or the predetermined display result is obtained. Execute. On the other hand, the specific notification effect execution means performs the second specific action after the first specific action in the specific gaming state is performed following the effect by the common effect execution means when the specific display result is obtained. The effect which alert | reports that it is a specific game state in the period until is performed. This increases the unexpectedness of the game by giving the player the impression that the game has been controlled to the specific game state after the start-up operation even though no game medium has entered the specific area. Along with a sense of expectation that the medium will enter, and to maintain a sense of expectation that the variable prize-winning device will be controlled from the first state to the specific state after the second state, the game entertainment will be improved. Can do.

  3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the operation switching control means is a first operation mode by the movable member. The first operation medium is likely to enter the specific area until the predetermined operation control time elapses. After the operation control time elapses, the movable member is operated in the second operation pattern in which the game medium is unlikely to enter the specific area. Thereby, when the variable winning device changes between the first state and the second state by the start operation, it is possible to provide a period during which the game medium easily enters the specific area and a period during which the game medium does not easily enter the specific area. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the game by the variable winning device.

  4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the operation switching control means is a second operation mode by the movable member, wherein the second medium makes it difficult for the game medium to enter the specific area until a predetermined operation control time elapses. After the operation control time elapses, the movable member is operated in the first operation pattern in which the game medium easily enters the specific area. Thereby, when the variable winning device changes between the first state and the second state by the start operation, it is possible to provide a period during which the game medium easily enters the specific area and a period during which the game medium does not easily enter the specific area. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the game by the variable winning device.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 4, the movable member is a rotatable guide member, and the operation switching control means rotates the guide member in a predetermined direction in the first operation pattern, and in the second operation pattern. The guide member is configured to rotate in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize whether the game medium is the first operation pattern that is easy to enter the specific area or the second operation pattern that is difficult to enter, and the game medium is in the specific area. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the player's expectation for entering into the specific gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect, the control time determining means determines the operation control time to be one of a plurality of predetermined types corresponding to the predetermined display result determined by the display result determining means. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the game by the variable winning device and improve the interest of the game.

  7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the special guidance control means starts variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means for a period during which the game control means can guide the game medium to the starting area. The period until the variable display result is derived and displayed and the probability determined by the second display result determination means as either the first display result or the second display result are compared with those in the normal game state in the special game state. Change. As a result, for example, in the special gaming state, the game medium can easily enter the starting area, so that the gaming state can be advantageous to the player as compared to the normal gaming state, and the gaming interest in the special gaming state is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine according to claim 7, to determine whether the process data stored in the process data storage means is data indicating the execution of a specific operation process, if not the data indicating the execution of a specific operation process When it is determined, it can be determined that it is the determination period, and the presence or absence of abnormality can be determined.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 2 that is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame and a main configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is pivotally supported on one side of the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed. The front frame 3 is provided. A front door frame 4 is provided on the upper front part of the front frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and an upper pan opening and closing frame 11 is provided on the lower part of the front face of the front frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In addition to the front door frame 4 and the upper plate opening / closing frame 11, the front frame 3 is provided with a game board 40, a lower plate 27, an ashtray unit 29, an operation handle 30, and the like. On the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a card unit device 128 (FIG. 6) for lending a game ball to a player (lending a ball) may be attached.

  The front door frame 4 is provided with a circular see-through window 5 as a game opening through which the game area 41 of the game board 40 can be seen substantially. On the front side of the front door frame 4, along the outer periphery of the circular see-through window 5, an upper decorative unit 22 as a decorative member is provided on the upper side, and a left decorative unit 23 as a covering member is provided on the left side. A right decoration unit 24 as a covering member is provided on the side, and a lower decoration unit 25 as a front component is provided at the lower part. Inside the upper decoration unit 22, game effect LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 13, 14a, 14c and game effect lamps 14b, 14d as light emitting members are provided so as to face the front side of the front door frame 4. Yes. Inside the left decorative unit 23, game effect lamps 16a and 16b as light emitting members are provided so as to face the front side of the front door frame 4. In the right decoration unit 24, game effect lamps 17a and 17b as light emitting members are provided so as to face the front side of the front door frame 4. The game effect LEDs 13, 14 a, 14 c and the game effect lamps 14 b, 14 d, 16 a, 16 b, 17 a, 17 b are lit or blinked according to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  On the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 provided at the lower front surface of the front door frame 4 is formed an upper plate 19 configured by, for example, fixing a plate member in which a plurality of synthetic resin members are combined. A prize ball outlet 20 is formed on the upstream side of the upper plate 19. A ball removal operation unit 21 is provided on the downstream side of the upper plate 19. In addition, a ball lending operation unit operated when borrowing a game ball via a card unit device 128 installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided on the upper edge and the outer edge of the upper plate 19, and a card unit. There may be provided a return operation unit operated when instructing the return of the card inserted into the device 128, a balance display unit for displaying the balance of the card inserted into the card unit device 128, and the like. The ball lending operation unit, the return operation unit, and the balance display unit may be mounted on the balance display board 104 (FIG. 6). In the upper plate 19, game balls paid out from the prize ball payout exit 20 are stored. The game balls stored in the upper plate 19 are supplied to the launch position into the game area 41. When the ball removal operation unit 21 is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 are guided to the lower plate 27 through a predetermined ball removal passage or a ball removal hole. A cylinder lock 26 faces the right side of the upper plate 19.

  Excess spheres overflowing from the upper plate 19 are stored in the lower plate 27 provided at the lower portion of the front frame 3. Below the lower plate 27, a ball removal operation lever 28 is slidably attached. An ashtray unit 29 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 27, and an operation handle 30 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 27. The operation handle 30 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The operation handle 30 is provided with a single firing switch for stopping the driving of the firing motor included in the ball striking device 130 (FIG. 6) and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  Speakers 12a and 12b that generate sound effects (including sound) according to the progress of the game are provided on the left and right sides of the upper decorative unit 22 in the front door frame 4. On the right side of the upper part of the left decorative unit 23, a prize ball LED 10 is provided so as to be visible from the front of the front door frame 4. On the left side of the upper part of the right decorative unit 24, a ball-off LED 9 is provided from the front of the front door frame 4. It is provided so as to be visible. The prize ball LED 10 and the ball break LED 9 are game-related information light emitting members that emit light to notify information related to the game separately from the game effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a predetermined number of balls are generated based on the occurrence of winning balls. The prize ball LED 10 informs that the prize ball has been paid out, and informs the ball break LED 9 that the prize balls to be paid out are insufficient. In addition, a see-through window 18 is provided on the side of the lower decoration unit 25 for visually recognizing a sticker attached to the game board 40.

  The game board 40 is formed of a substantially square plywood, and is housed and fixed in a game board housing frame portion integrally formed on the back surface side of the front frame 3. On the surface of the game board 40, guide rails 42a and 42b each having a stainless steel plate formed in an arc shape are attached. Then, the game balls launched from the hit ball launching device 130 are driven so as to be guided into the circular game area 41 formed by the guide rails 42a and 42b.

  The game area 41 is provided with a first special variable winning ball device 66, a second special variable winning ball device 47, a normal variable winning ball device 61, a normal symbol display device 63, and the like. In addition, the game area 41 includes various winning holes for winning game balls, such as the normal winning holes 53a to 53c, or passing areas for passing the game balls, such as the passing gate 58, and the flow direction of the gaming balls. Wind turbines and a number of obstacle nails are provided. Further, at the lowermost part of the game area 41, there is provided an out port 69 into which a game ball that does not win any winning area is taken.

  On the left side of the first special variable winning ball device 66, an ordinary variable winning ball device 61 is provided. 2A and 2B are cross-sectional views of the normal variable winning ball device 61 between α and β shown in FIG. 1, and show an enlarged internal structure of the normal variable winning ball device 61. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is provided in a path through which a game ball can enter in the game area 41, and includes a start area 56, a start port switch 60, and a plate-shaped variable guide member 61a. The variable guiding member 61 a is switched between advancement and retraction by the driving force of the ordinary electric utility solenoid 59, and allows the game ball to be guided to the starting area 56 when advanced. For example, when the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 59 is not driven and the variable guiding member 61a is retracted in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. It becomes difficult (impossible) to guide the game ball that has entered 61 to the start area 56, and the game ball that has not entered the start area 56 is guided to return to the game area 41. On the other hand, when the solenoid 59 for an ordinary electric accessory is driven and the variable guiding member 61a has advanced to the near side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. It becomes easy (possible) to guide the game ball that has entered the winning ball apparatus 61 to the starting area 56. The game ball that has entered the start area 56 is detected by the start port switch 60.

  A normal symbol start memory LED 64 is provided on the left side of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47. For example, the normal symbol start memory LED 64 is configured to include four LEDs, and displays a reserved memory number (ordinary figure reserved memory number) as an effective passing ball number that has passed through the passing gate 58. Below the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66, a passing gate 58 incorporating a gate switch 58a is provided. A normal symbol display device 63 is provided on the right side of the second special variable winning ball device 47.

  The normal symbol display device 63 displays (variably displays) the normal symbol (also referred to as “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) in a variable manner. The normal symbol display device 63 is provided with, for example, two LEDs, and is lit in a general game as a variable display game that starts when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 58 is detected by the gate switch 58a. , Blinking, coloring, etc. are controlled. As a specific example, the normal symbol display device 63 changes the normal symbol by alternately lighting “O” and “X” at two places in the upper and lower positions in the normal game, and after the predetermined time has passed, the normal symbol display device 63 The display result is derived by lighting either “O” or “X” at each location. At this time, when “×” is lit, “usually lost” is derived as a variable display result of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. On the other hand, when “◯” is lit, “per figure” is derived as the variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual game. When the result of variable display of the normal symbol in the normal game by the normal symbol display device 63 is “per normal”, the variable variable winning ball device 61 variably induces by the driving force of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory. The advancement of the member 61a allows the game ball that has entered the normal variable winning ball device 61 to enter the start area 56, and when a predetermined time has elapsed, the drive of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped and the variable induction member 61a is stopped. As a result of retreating, the game ball that has entered the normally variable winning ball apparatus 61 cannot enter the starting area 56.

  The first special variable winning ball device 66 is provided with a special symbol display device 44a, various decorative LEDs / lamps 32, and the like. The special symbol display device 44a displays (variably displays) the special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) in a variable manner. The special symbol display device 44a is provided with, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED, and in a special symbol game as a variable display game, a special symbol which is a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified is displayed in a variable manner (Variable display). The special symbol variably displayed by the special symbol display device 44 a is a display symbol different from the normal symbol variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 63. As an example, the special symbol display device 44a variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "00" to "99", symbols indicating "-", and the like. In the special symbol game, the special symbol display device 44a starts variable display of the special symbol based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the starting area 56 formed in the normal variable winning ball device 61 is detected by the starting port switch 60. Is done. In this embodiment, the special symbol display device 44a includes “left” and “right” special symbol variable display portions, and in each special symbol variable display portion, a number indicating “0” to “9” or “−”. Variable display of special symbols composed of symbols and the like indicating. A plurality of types of special symbols that are variably displayed in each special symbol variable display section are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. For example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numerical values indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Has been.

  FIGS. 3A and 5 are enlarged perspective views showing the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66. FIG. On the left side of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66, there are provided an opening / closing piece (opening / closing member) 81 and an opening 82 serving as a big prize opening (first big prize opening). The opening / closing piece 81 is pivotally supported so as to change the opening 82 between the open state which is the first state and the closed state which is the second state, and is opened and closed via a predetermined link mechanism or the like. It is connected to a single solenoid 105. The opening 82 allows the inside and the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 to communicate with each other, and allows the game ball to enter the first special variable winning ball device 66 when the opening / closing piece 81 is in the open state. Can do.

  A game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 through the opening 82 is detected by the first count switch 106. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 106 is guided by the approach ball guide passage 110. A sorting member 83 is provided on the downstream side of the approach ball guiding passage 110. The distribution member 83 is connected to the distribution solenoid 108 via a predetermined link mechanism or the like, and distributes the path of the game ball guided by the approach ball guide path 110.

  For example, when the driving of the distribution solenoid 108 is stopped, the distribution member 83 moves to the front side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the game balls guided by the approach ball guide passage 110 are distributed to the first region 85 through the first guide passage 124. On the other hand, when the sorting solenoid 108 is driven, the sorting member 83 moves to the back side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the game balls guided by the approach ball guiding passage 110 are distributed to the second region 88 through the second guiding passage 117. A game ball passing through the second guide passage 117 is detected by the approach ball detector 109. As described above, the distribution member 83 changes between the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area 85 and the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area 88.

  The first region 85 is provided with a member that changes the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling plate on which the game ball rolls. A game ball that rolls on the rolling plate to the near side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 falls from the rolling plate, and any one of the first specific advance entrance 89 and the first normal winning openings 94a and 94b. Enter the crab. For example, the game balls distributed to the first area 85 enter the first specific entrance 89 as the specific area with a probability of 1/10.

  FIGS. 3B and 3C are enlarged views of the first region 85 in the vicinity of the first specific entrance 89 and the first normal winning openings 94a and 94b. As shown in FIGS. 3B and 3C, a storage plate 118b for storing game balls is provided on the upper part of the first specific advance entrance 89 so as to be able to advance and retreat. The storage plate 118b is connected to the storage solenoid 118 via a predetermined link mechanism such as a storage drive member 118a.

  For example, when the storage solenoid 118 is driven, as shown in FIG. 3B, the storage plate 118b moves (advances) to the near side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to enter the storage state. At this time, the game ball dropped from the rolling plate to the first specific entrance 89 is stored by the storage plate 118b. On the other hand, when the drive of the storage solenoid 118 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 3C, the storage plate 118b moves (withdraws) to the back side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the storage release state is established. Become. At this time, the game ball that has fallen from the rolling plate to the first specific entrance 89 enters the first specific entrance 89. In this way, the storage plate 118b changes between a storage state and a storage release state.

  The game ball that has entered the first specific entrance 89 is detected by the first specific ball detector 121a. The game ball that has passed through the first specific ball detector 121 a is guided to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 through the discharge guiding area 123. The game balls that have entered the first normal winning holes 94a and 94b are not detected by the first specific ball detector 121a but are guided to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 through the discharge guiding area 123.

  The second region 88 is provided with a rotating body 79 formed to be rotatable. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the second region 88. The game ball guided to the second region 88 through the second guide passage 117 can roll so as to make a circular motion around the rotating body 79 as indicated by arrows A11 and A12 shown in FIG. The rotating body 79 is formed with a movable entrance 79a through which a game ball can enter. The rotating body 79 can rotate (turn) from a predetermined initial position by the driving force of the motor 127 (FIG. 6). For example, assuming that the position where the center of the movable advance entrance 79a comes on the reference line L1 shown in FIG. 4 is the initial position, the forward rotation direction (forward direction) indicated by arrow A21 in FIG. The rotation operation (turning) can be performed with the rotation direction being switchable in any of the directions (reverse directions). Further, during rotation, the rotation direction of the rotating body 79 can be switched between the forward direction and the reverse direction. Even if the rotation of the motor 127 is stopped, the rotating body 79 cannot return to an initial position from an arbitrary rotation position after the rotation. That is, in order to return the rotating body 79 from the arbitrary rotation position after the rotation to the initial position, it is necessary to continue driving the motor 127. In this embodiment, the maximum required time until the rotating body 79 returns from the arbitrary rotation position to the initial position is “5.0 seconds”. On the rolling plate formed around the rotator 79, for example, a rib or a groove may be formed so that the game ball can easily enter the movable advance entrance 79a at the position indicated by the arrow A15. .

  The rotating body 79 may be provided with a detector that can specify the amount of rotation of the rotating body 79, such as the rotational position of the movable advance entrance 79a. For example, it is only necessary that the amount of rotation of the rotating body 79 can be specified by attaching a rotary encoder to the rotating shaft of the rotating body 79. Alternatively, the rotation of the rotating body 79 is performed by executing predetermined calculation processing based on the rotation speed of the motor 127 (for example, rpm [rounds per minute], etc.), the time during which the motor 127 is driven in the forward direction and the reverse direction, and the like. The amount may be specified. Alternatively, the rotation amount of the rotator 79 may be specified by attaching a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation position of the rotator 79 to the rotation shaft of the rotator 79.

  The game ball that has entered the movable advance entrance 79a, for example, rolls on the bottom plate provided at the lower part of the rotator 79 with the rotation of the rotator 79 while being held inside the movable advance entrance 79a. It is distributed to either the 2 specific entrance 91 or the second normal winning opening 94c. For example, the game balls guided to the second area 88 are distributed to the second specific entrance 91 as the specific area with a probability of 1/2. Here, since the game ball easily enters the movable advance entrance 79a at the position indicated by the arrow A15, when the rotating body 79 is rotated in the forward direction, the game ball is rotated in the reverse direction. The game ball enters the second specific entrance 91 with a higher probability than. For example, the game ball guided to the second area 88 enters the second specific entrance 91 with a probability of 3/4 when the rotating body 79 is rotating in the forward direction, while the rotating body 79 is When it is rotating in the reverse direction, it enters the second specific entrance 91 with a probability of 1/4.

  The game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 91 is detected by the second specific ball detector 121b. The game ball that has passed through the second specific ball detector 121 b is guided to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 through the discharge guiding area 123. The game ball that has entered the second normal winning opening 94c is guided to the outside of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 through the discharge guiding area 123 without being detected by the second specific ball detector 121b. As shown in FIG. 5, all the game balls guided by the discharge guiding area 123 are detected by the discharge ball detector 122 and then discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 66, an effect display device 44b is provided on the upper right side of the second guide passage 117. The effect display device 44b may be any device that performs screen display by a dot matrix method using a large number of pixels (pixels) such as a liquid crystal display (LCD). In the effect display device 44b, a display area 80 for displaying an effect image is formed. In the display area 80, in response to the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal game by the normal symbol display device 63, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by the decorative symbol variable display section divided into three parts. Is variably displayed. This variable display of decorative symbols is also included in the variable display game performed based on the start condition being satisfied.

  For example, in the display area 80, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol variable display portions are arranged, and each ornament corresponding to the normal symbol display device 63 executing the normal game. The decorative symbols are variably displayed on the symbol variable display section. That is, when the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display device 63 is started, the decorative symbol variable display (for example, the left, middle, and right) variable symbol display units in the display area 80 (for example, Switching display and scroll display) is started, and thereafter, when the fixed normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 63, “left”, “middle”, “ Each of the decorative pattern variable display units “right” displays a fixed decorative pattern that is a result of variable display of the decorative pattern (stop display). In addition, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design variable display portions may be movable within the display area 80 so that the decorative design can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. .

  In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative variable display portions in the display area 80, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals “1” to “8”, English characters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters, symbols, and character images, etc. Note that character images are, for example, people, animals, and other objects. Or a symbol image such as a character, or an effect image showing any other figure) is displayed variably as a decorative pattern. A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  When variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, in the decorative symbol variable display sections of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from small to large symbol numbers. When the display with the symbol number “8” is displayed, the decorative symbol with the smallest symbol number “1” is displayed. Alternatively, when a display with the smallest symbol number “1” is displayed by switching display or scrolling from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, the next largest symbol number is “8”. A certain decorative pattern may be displayed. During the variable display of the decorative design, for example, an image for performing various display effects such as a hit notice effect image for notifying that the variable display result is “win” is displayed in the display area 80. Also good.

  In addition, the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b may be provided with a normal symbol start memory display area for displaying the number of ordinary symbols stored as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 58. As a specific example, when 1 is added to the number of reserved maps, one of the display parts that are normally blue (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts that are blue) is displayed in red. Change. On the other hand, when 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved maps, one of the display parts displayed in red (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part displayed in red) is returned to blue display. . Alternatively, in the normal symbol start memory display area, a player or the like may be able to recognize the number of universal symbols reserved by displaying a number indicating the number of universal symbols reserved.

  In addition, in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, the normal symbol variably displayed so that the normal symbol variably displayed in the normal game executed by the normal symbol display device 63 can be specified separately from the decorative symbol. A display area may be provided. As a specific example, in response to the start of variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 63, “○” corresponding to variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “x” or the like is started. Then, in response to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbol in the special symbol game ends and the fixed normal symbol is stopped and displayed, “○” or “×” indicating the fixed normal symbol in the normal symbol variable display area, etc. The effect image may be stopped and displayed.

  A restriction flange portion 75 that prevents the game ball from entering the installation position of the effect display device 44b is extended from the upper end to the right end of the first special variable winning ball device 66. A guide passage 76 is formed between the restriction flange portion 75 and the guide rail 42 a that defines the right end from the upper right end of the game area 41. In the upper right portion of the game area 41, for example, a buffer member 70 configured using rubber or the like is provided.

  A second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is provided below the passing gate 58. The second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 has an opening / closing plate 49 that is driven to open and close by a second large winning opening door solenoid 65, and the opening / closing plate 49 serves as an opening that becomes a large winning opening (second winning winning opening). The part 48 is changed between an open state that is a first state and a closed state that is a second state. A game ball that has entered the inside of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 from the opened opening 48 is detected by the second count switch 52. The second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is provided with a third specific ball detector 51 which is a detector for establishing a big hit continuation right with the detection of the game ball (V winning detection). ing. In the upper part of the third specific ball detector 51, once a V prize is detected, the game ball is prevented from passing through the third specific ball detector 51 until the opening 48 is closed and then opened. A V-shutter is provided. The V shutter is connected to a V shutter solenoid 50 through a predetermined link mechanism or the like.

  On the lower left side of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66, a normal winning opening 53a having a normal winning ball detector 55a is provided. Further, on the left side of the passing gate 58 and the second variable winning ball device 47, a normal winning hole 53b having a normal winning ball detector 55b is provided. On the right side of the passing gate 58 and the second special variable winning ball device 47, a normal winning port 53c incorporating a normal winning ball detector 55c is provided. When a game ball is detected by any of the normal winning ball detectors 55a to 55c, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out.

  For example, when a normal symbol indicating “◯” corresponding to “per symbol” is derived as a fixed normal symbol that is a display result of performing variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 63. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, as shown in FIG. 2B, the variable guiding member 61a advances to the front side in the depth direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the starting area 56. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the starting area 56 by the retracting of the variable guiding member 61a.

  For example, when a normal symbol indicating “◯” corresponding to “per symbol” is derived as a fixed normal symbol that is a display result of performing variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 63. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, as shown in FIG. 2B, the variable guiding member 61a advances to the front side in the depth direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the starting area 56. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the starting area 56 by the retracting of the variable guiding member 61a.

  In the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 44a, when a predetermined time elapses after the variable symbol special display is started, the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol variable display result is stopped (displayed). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. In the special game, special symbols (losing symbols) other than the big bonus symbol and the small bonus symbol may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbols, or only either the big bonus symbol or the small bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. Also good.

  When the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. In addition, when the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the game state is controlled to a small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a specific example, a special symbol indicating “77” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating “22”, “44”, “66”, “88” is small. It is a winning symbol.

  In the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, a predetermined effect image may be displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol being performed in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 44a. Thereafter, different effect images may be displayed depending on whether the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” or “small hit”. In the big hit game state, a big hit medium effect image is displayed. When the big hit gaming state ends, an effect image for the end of the big hit is displayed. In the small hit gaming state, the effect image for small hits is displayed. When the small hit game state is ended, an effect image for the end of the small hit game is displayed. Furthermore, when a game ball is detected by the approaching ball detector 109 in the small hit gaming state, an effect image for notifying that the game ball has been guided to the second area 88 may be displayed.

  In the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the small hit symbol, the opening / closing piece 81 of the first special variable winning ball device 66 is rotated to open the opening 82 in a predetermined starting manner. To change from the closed state to the open state, and return to the closed state after a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the opening 82 performed in such a small hit gaming state is referred to as a starting operation. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the starting operation for opening and closing the opening 82 is performed a plurality of times, for example, two times. In each starting operation, the first special variable winning ball device 66 is advantageous for the player in the first state. As an open state. In the small hit gaming state, the starting operation for opening and closing the opening 82 of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is not limited to being performed a plurality of times, and the starting operation may be performed only once. As described above, the start operation is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the start area 56 is detected by the start port switch 60, and the variable symbol display result of the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 44a is "small hit". Accordingly, the opening 82 of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is changed from the closed state, which is the second state disadvantageous to the player, to the open state, which is the first state advantageous to the player, again. The second state is changed to the closed state.

  A game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 from the opening 82 that has been opened by the starting operation enters either the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 as a specific area. When entering, it becomes a big hit gaming state. Here, when the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 are distributed to the first area 85 by the distribution member 83, they enter the first specific entrance 89 with a probability of 1/10. Then, it is detected by the first specific sphere detector 121a. On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is distributed to the second region 88 by the distribution member 83, the rotation body 79 is rotated in the forward direction. The second specific entry is detected with a probability of 1/4 even when it enters the second specific entry 91 and is detected by the second specific sphere detector 121b and the rotating body 79 rotates in the reverse direction. It enters the mouth 91 and is detected by the second specific sphere detector 121b. In this regard, the second area 88 is more advantageous to the player than the first area 85 because it has a higher probability of being in the big hit gaming state after being in the small hit gaming state. Further, the distribution state of the distribution member 83 is more in the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area 88 than in the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area 85. It becomes an advantageous state for the player.

  As described above, when the confirmed special symbol in the special game becomes a small hit symbol, the game that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 opened in the starting operation. Corresponding to the detection of the ball by the first specific ball detector 121a or the second specific ball detector 121b, the control for setting the big hit gaming state is performed. On the other hand, when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol, regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91 which are specific areas, Control to make a big hit gaming state is performed. In this case, the operation of opening the opening 48 provided in the second special variable winning ball device 47 is started without opening the opening 82 provided in the first special variable winning ball device 66. .

  In the big hit game state, a game of a predetermined operation unit can be executed as a round game, and the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is changed from the closed state as the second state to the open state as the first state. In this embodiment, as an example, the opening / closing plate 49 of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 changes the opening 48 serving as the second big winning opening in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 from the closed state to the open state. By changing the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 from the second state to the first state, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls In response to the occurrence of the above, the operation unit until the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is changed from the first state to the second state by changing the opening 48 from the open state to the closed state, It is defined as one round game.

  In the big hit game state based on the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has become a big hit symbol, the maximum number of times that the round game can be repeatedly executed (can be continued) (maximum round value) is set to “15”. . After each round game other than the last round game that has reached the maximum number of continuations, the next round game can be executed. At this time, the fact that the game ball is detected by the second count switch 52 or the third specific ball detector 51 may be set as a condition (round continuation condition) for enabling the next round game to be executed.

  A game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 by the starting operation based on the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special game has become a small hit symbol enters the second specific entrance 91 to Even in the big hit gaming state controlled by being detected by the two specific ball detector 121b, the maximum number of round games to be continued is set to "15". On the other hand, the big hit controlled by the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 in the starting operation entering the first specific advance entrance 89 and detected by the first specific ball detector 121a. In the gaming state, the maximum number of continuations of the round game is set to “1”, “3”, or “5”. In this respect, the second area 88 is more advantageous for the player than the first area 85. Further, the distribution state of the distribution member 83 is more in the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area 88 than in the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area 85. It becomes an advantageous state for the player.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, unlike the normal gaming state and the big hit gaming state, the special gaming state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player compared to the normal gaming state is controlled. In this special game state, the probability that the variable display result in the normal game is “per normal game” is improved as compared with the normal game state. Note that the normal gaming state is a gaming state other than a special gaming state or a special gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the probability that the variable display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure” is a pachinko machine. 1 is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state (for example, when a predetermined return process is not executed after power-on as in the case where a system reset is performed). In this embodiment, after entering the special game state, the special game state is ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) the usual game is executed without being controlled to the big hit game state.

  In the special game state, the variable symbol display time of the normal symbol, which is the time from the start of the change of the normal symbol in the normal game by the normal symbol display device 63 to the stop display of the fixed normal symbol, is shortened. Or, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61, the time for which the variable guiding member 61a advances and the game ball is guided to the starting area 56 may become long.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with various sensors, such as a magnet sensor, a radio wave sensor, and a vibration sensor, that detect fraudulent acts and fraudulent operations at predetermined positions. As an example, a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor may be provided on the back surface of the game board 40 corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area 41 so that an illegal act using the magnet or the radio wave can be detected. The magnet sensor, for example, guides a game ball with a magnetic force to a first specific entrance 89 or a second specific entrance 91 that is a specific area provided in the first special variable winning ball device 66, or a normal variable winning ball. A magnet used for fraud such as guiding a game ball to a starting area 56 provided in the device 61 by magnetic force is detected. For example, the radio wave sensor performs an illegal action such as turning on detection signals output from various switches and detectors such as the start opening switch 60, the first specific sphere detector 121a, and the second specific sphere detector 121b. Detect radio waves used in Further, a vibration sensor may be provided at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front frame 3 or the front door frame 4 so that an illegal act caused by vibrating the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be detected. For example, when a game ball enters the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66, the vibration sensor hits the front frame 3 or the front door frame 4 to change the movement of the game ball and becomes a specific area. Vibrations caused by fraudulent actions such as entering the entrance 89 or the second specific winning opening 91 are detected.

  In addition, an operation monitoring sensor may be provided at the open position of the open / close piece 81 and the open / close plate 49, the advance position of the variable guide member 61a, and the like. As an example, the sensor for monitoring the operation of the opening / closing piece 81 can detect whether the opening 82 as the first big prize opening is in an open state or a closed state by the opening / closing piece 81. If it is detected that the open / close piece 81 is in the open position even though the driving of the open / close piece solenoid 105 is stopped, the opening 82 serving as the first big prize opening is illegally opened. What is necessary is just to enable it to perform error determination as what was made into the state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various types such as a main board 120, an effect control board 90, an audio frame lamp board 92, a lamp driver board 93, a power supply board 97, a payout control board 98, and a balance display board 104 as shown in FIG. The control board is mounted. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a peripheral power supply relay board 147, a peripheral command relay board 57, a relay board such as a design relay board 84 and a switch relay board 95, a special symbol board 850, a normal symbol board 86, and a normal symbol memory board 87. Is also installed.

  Signals from the detectors 51, 55 a to 55 c, 109, 121 a, 121 b, 122 and the switches 52, 58 a, 106 provided on the game board 40 are input to the main board 120 via the switch relay board 95. Is done. The main board 120 also receives a signal from the start port switch 60. A random number generation circuit 60 a is connected to the main board 120, and when the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is turned on, the count value at that time is input to the main board 120.

  From the main board 120, drive control signals for driving and controlling the solenoids 50, 59, 65, 105, 108, 118 and the motor 127 provided on the game board 40 are output to each part by the switch relay board 95. Relayed. The main board 120 outputs information signals such as an electric decoration signal and a sound effect signal according to the game state, and is transmitted to the voice frame lamp board 92 via the peripheral command relay board 57 and the effect control board 90. The Further, an effect control command for controlling the display state of the effect display device 44 b is output from the main board 120 and transmitted to the effect control board 90 via the peripheral command relay board 57. In addition, a display control signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol display device 44a and the like is output from the main substrate 120, and the special symbol substrate 850, the normal symbol substrate 86, and the normal symbol memory are stored via the symbol relay substrate 84. It is transmitted to the substrate 87 or the like. A board external terminal board 96 is connected to the main board 120 to transmit various game information.

  Various decorative LEDs and lamps 32 are connected to the main board 120 via a peripheral command relay board 57, an effect control board 90, a voice frame lamp board 92, and a lamp driver board 93. The game effect LEDs 13, 14a, 14c, and the game effect lamps 14b, 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b are mounted on a printed circuit board, respectively, and together with the speakers 12a, 12b, the peripheral command relay board 57 and the effect control board 90, It is connected to the main board 120 via the voice frame lamp board 92. The peripheral command relay board 57 relays an information signal output from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90.

  The main board 120 is supplied with electric power from the power supply board 97 and drives various game effect LEDs / lamps 13, 14a to 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b, various decoration LEDs / lamps 32, speakers 12a, 12b, and the like. The power to be supplied is supplied to the voice frame lamp board 92 via the peripheral power supply relay board 147. The power supply board 97 receives AC 24V AC power supply serving as a primary power supply via a power supply cord, and supplies power as a secondary power supply to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98. The power supply board 97 is also equipped with a clear switch 97a for clearing all operations in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The peripheral power supply relay board 147 relays the power from the main board 120 to the voice frame lamp board 92. Also, a prize ball number signal is output from the main board 120 based on detection signals from the detectors 51, 55 a to 55 c and the switches 52, 60, 106, and transmitted to the payout control board 98.

  A game control microcomputer 99 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 120. The game control microcomputer 99 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 100 that stores a game control program and the like, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 111 that is used as a work memory, and a program A CPU (Central Processing Unit) 112 that controls the progress of the game and an I / O 114 that transmits a command serving as a control signal to the effect control board 90 and the like. In the game control microcomputer 99, the CPU 112 executes a program read from the ROM 100 and uses the RAM 111 as a work area, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the main board 120, various random values are used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of random values used on the main board 120 side. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 120, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a normal figure display result, and a random value MR3 for determining the number of rounds. Is used, and control and processing are performed so that numerical data indicating these random numbers can be counted. In order to enhance the gaming effect, random numbers other than these may be used on the main board 120 side. Numerical data indicating numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR3 is generated based on the count value input from the random number generation circuit 60a. Further, the numerical data indicating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR3 may be counted by updating by software using the random counter different from the random number generation circuit 60a by the CPU 112.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit” or “small hit”. It takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535”. In other words, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is added and updated by the random number generation circuit 60a based on clock control different from the clock control of the game control microcomputer 992. Byte numeric data. In the random number generation circuit 60a, when the input signal from the start port switch 60 is turned on, the count value in the built-in counter is latched in the storage buffer, and the latched count value is used as numerical data indicating the random value MR1. This is input to the game control microcomputer 99 of the main board 120. In the game control microcomputer 99, for example, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the random value MR1 is within a predetermined range, thereby determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, Is determined.

  The random number value MR2 for determining the normal map display result is a random number value used for determining whether the variable display result in the normal game is “per normal map” or “missing the normal map”. For example, a value in the range of “0” to “149” is taken. That is, the random number value MR2 for determining the normal game display result is used to determine whether or not to guide the game ball to the starting area 56 by the normal variable winning ball device 61 based on the variable display result in the normal game. Used for.

  The random number MR3 for determining the number of rounds is that the game ball that has entered the inside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 opened by the opening / closing piece 81 in the starting operation enters the first specific entrance 89. This is a random value used to determine the maximum continuation number (upper limit number) at which the round game executed in the big hit gaming state can be continued from a plurality of types when entering, for example, “0” to “ It takes a value in the range of “199”.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 100 provided in the game control microcomputer 99 shown in FIG. 6 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 100 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 112 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 100 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 112 to output various control signals from the main board 120, and various symbols in variable display such as special symbols, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc. A variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that are the variation modes is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 100 includes, for example, the special-figure display result determination table 200 shown in FIG. 8, the normal time normal display display result determination table 210A shown in FIG. 9A, and the advantageous time normal time shown in FIG. 9B. A figure display result determination table 210B and the like are included.

  The special figure display result determination table 200 shown in FIG. 8 is a table referred to for determining whether the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit” or “small hit”. For example, the special figure display result determination table 200 is configured from setting data (determination data) that associates (assigns) the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination with a display result type, a confirmed special symbol, a round control pattern, and the like. ing. By referring to the special figure display result determination table 200, when the display result type is “big hit”, the confirmed special symbol is determined as “77” as the big hit symbol. In addition, the display result type in which the variable display result in the special game is “small hit” includes a plurality of types of small hit types such as “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. Different determined special symbols may be determined corresponding to the hit types. As a specific example, when the display result type is “first small hit”, the determined special symbol is determined as “22” included in the small hit symbol, and the display result type is “second small hit”. In this case, the confirmed special symbol is determined to be “44” included in the small hit symbol, and when the display result type is “third small hit”, the fixed special symbol is determined to be “66” included in the small hit symbol. When the display result type is “fourth small hit”, the confirmed special symbol is determined as “88” included in the small hit symbol.

  The normal time normal map display result determination table 210A shown in FIG. 9A and the advantageous time normal map display result determination table 210B shown in FIG. 9B set the variable display result in the normal game as “per normal map”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is “usually lost”. For example, the normal time normal map display result determination table 210A and the advantageous time normal map display result determination table 210B each associate (assign) the random number MR2 for determining the normal map display result to the display result type, the general electric operation pattern, and the like. It consists of setting data (determination data). The display result type in which the variable display result in the general game is “per normal map” includes a plurality of types per general map such as “per first general map” and “per second general map”.

  When the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal game state corresponding to the start of the change of the normal symbol based on the establishment of the start condition of the normal game, the normal time shown in FIG. While the general chart display result determination table 210A is referred to, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special game state, the advantageous time general map display result determination table 210B shown in FIG. 9B is referred to. In the normal time normal map display result determination table 210A shown in FIG. 9A and the advantageous time normal map display result determination table 210B shown in FIG. 9B, the display result types are “per 1st normal map” and “second”. The assignment of the random number value MR2 for determining the normal map display result for each of the “per 2 normal maps” is different. Therefore, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state and when the gaming state is the special gaming state, the display result types are determined as “per 1st base figure” and “per 2nd base figure”, respectively. The ratio is different. Further, in the normal time normal map display result determination table 210A shown in FIG. 9A and the advantageous time normal map display result determination table 210B shown in FIG. The normal electric operation pattern associated with each "per figure" is different. Therefore, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state, the display result type is determined as “per 1st base figure” or “per 2nd base figure”. Depending on the situation, the period for guiding the game ball to the starting area 56 may be varied by driving the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61 to advance the variable guiding member 61a. it can.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 100 includes, for example, a special figure variation pattern determination table 220 shown in FIG. 10, a common figure variation pattern determination table 221 shown in FIG. 11, a round number decision table 230 shown in FIG. That's fine.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 220 shown in FIG. 10 is for determining a fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern) from when the special symbol variable display is started until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure game. It is a table to be referenced. For example, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 220 displays the special figure fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of variable display of special symbols and the start of variable display of special symbols until the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed. Setting data (determination data) for determining whether the special figure display result, which is a display result type in the game, is “big hit” or “first small hit” to “fourth small hit” It is composed of In this embodiment, variation patterns from big hit, small hit A to small hit D are prepared as a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns that become special figure fluctuation patterns.

  11 is used to determine a variation pattern (ordinary variation pattern) from the start of variable display of a normal symbol until the fixed normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a general game. It is a table to be referenced. For example, the normal pattern change pattern determination table 221 indicates the normal map change time, which is the time from the start of variable display of a normal pattern to the display of a fixed normal symbol after the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped. The general map display result, which is the display result type in the game, is “first general figure big hit”, “second common figure big hit”, or “common figure loss”, and whether the advantageous state flag is off or on. Corresponding to whether or not there is configuration data (decision data) for determination. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of variation patterns to be a common map variation pattern, A per 1st general map, B per 1st general map, A per 2nd general map, B per 2nd general map, A variation pattern of A and ordinary figure B is prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the normal map change pattern determination table 221, the normal map display results are “per 1st normal map” and “2nd general map” corresponding to whether the advantageous state flag is OFF or ON. The normal figure change time when each “per figure” is determined is set to be different. Here, the advantageous state flag is turned off when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, and turned on when the gaming state is the special gaming state. Therefore, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state, either the “per 1st base figure” or “per 2nd base figure” is determined as the base map display result. Depending on whether or not the normal symbol display device 63 starts variable display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol change time from when the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed can be varied.

  In the round number determination table 230 shown in FIG. 12, a game ball that has entered the inside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 as the first big winning opening that has been opened by the starting operation is entered into the first specific entry. It is a table referred to in order to determine the maximum number of continuations of the round game executed in the big hit game state when entering the mouth 89. For example, the round number determination table 230 associates (assigns) the round number determination random number value MR3 with a round maximum value, such as “1”, “3”, and “5”, which is the maximum number of continuations, or a round control pattern. It consists of setting data (determination data).

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 100 includes, for example, a general electric operation pattern table 240A shown in FIG. 13A, a small hit control pattern table 240B shown in FIG. 13B, and a round control pattern shown in FIG. A table 240C and the like are included.

  In the ordinary electric action pattern table 240A shown in FIG. 13A, the ordinary electric accessory provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61 based on the fact that the variable display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of the driving operation in the solenoid 59 for the normal operation pattern. For example, four types of normal power operation patterns FA1-1, FA1-2, FA2-1, and FA2-2 are stored in the normal power operation pattern table 240A. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, each of the ordinary electric display pattern FA1-1 and the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-2 has a universal figure display result of “per 1st ordinary figure” and “second ordinary figure”. It is a pattern selected corresponding to the case where it is determined for each "per figure". When the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special game state, the normal electric display pattern FA2-1 and the general electric operation pattern FA2-2, respectively, indicate that the normal figure display results are “per 1st normal figure” and “2nd universal figure”. It is a pattern selected corresponding to the case where it is determined for each "per figure".

  For example, in the normal operation pattern FA1-1, as shown in FIG. 14, the winning time is set to “5 seconds”. Here, the winning time is determined by driving the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory by driving the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 to advance the variable guiding member 61a to guide the game ball to the starting area 56, where the starting winning is achieved. It indicates the length of time that is possible. In the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-2, the winning time is set to “0.1 seconds” different from the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-1. Therefore, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal game state, the game ball is displayed depending on whether the base map display result is “per 1st base map” or “per 2nd base map”. The period during which the vehicle can be guided to the start area 56 is different.

  In the ordinary electric operation pattern FA2-1, the winning time is set to “5 seconds”, which is the same as the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-1. On the other hand, in the ordinary electric operation pattern FA2-2, the winning time is set to “5 seconds” which is different from the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-2. Therefore, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal game state and when the game state is the special game state, the game ball is placed in the start area 56 when the normal map display result is “per 1st general map”. While the period during which guidance is possible does not change, the period during which the game ball can be guided to the start area 56 is different when the normal diagram display result is “per second map”.

  In the small hit control pattern table 240B shown in FIG. 13B, the setting contents of the game control microcomputer 99 by the CPU 112 during the period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit gaming state, It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of the drive operations of the solenoids 105, 108, 118 and the motor 127 as the small hit control pattern. For example, four types of small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 are stored in the small hit control pattern table 240B. Each of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 is a pattern selected corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is determined from “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”.

  Each of the plurality of types of small hit control patterns stored in the small hit control pattern table 240B includes, for example, setting data and control data associated with various determination values as shown in FIG. Various settings corresponding to the starting operation, such as the setting contents of the game control microcomputer 99 by the CPU 112 and the driving actions of the solenoids 105, 108, 118 and the motor 127 provided in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 Settings, control contents, execution timing, and the like. Note that the small hitting control pattern is not limited to the time series showing the setting and control contents and execution timing by the CPU 112, and may be listed regardless of the time series. For example, for the small hit control pattern, for each of the solenoids 105, 108, 118 and the motor 127, data indicating the timing for generating the drive control signal, data indicating the timing for stopping the output of the drive control signal, and the drive control signal These generation patterns and control data indicating a stop command may be individually associated with each other.

  Each determination value shown in the small hit control pattern shown in FIG. 15 (for example, specific winning validity determination value, large winning opening opening determination value, distribution drive determination value # 1, motor drive start determination value, storage drive start determination value) The distribution stop determination value # 1, the special winning opening opening determination value, the motor drive switching determination value, the storage release determination value, and the like) are set by the CPU 112 in the game control timer setting unit 163 of the game control data holding area 250 (FIG. It is compared with a game control process timer value which is a timer value in the game control process timer provided in 18). At this time, if any of the determination values matches the game control process timer value, setting or control according to the setting data or control data associated with the matching determination value is executed.

  Based on the settings of the small hitting control patterns KP1 to KP4, the operation modes of various movable members such as the opening / closing piece 81, the distributing member 83, and the rotating body 79 in the small hitting gaming state are stopped as a fixed special symbol in the special drawing game. It differs depending on the displayed small hit symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 16, in the small hit control pattern KP1 and the small hit control pattern KP3, the first rotation control time as a period for rotating the rotating body 79 in the forward direction by driving the motor 127 is “4.0 seconds. "Is set. In the small hit control pattern KP2 and the small hit control pattern KP4, the first rotation control time as a period for rotating the rotating body 79 in the forward direction is set to “2.0 seconds”.

  In the round control pattern table 240C shown in FIG. 13C, in the period when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the setting contents in the gaming control microcomputer 99 by the CPU 112 and the second It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of the driving operation of the solenoids 50 and 65 provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 47 as a round control pattern. For example, the round control pattern table 240C includes 15 round control patterns RP1-1 and RP2-1, 1 round control pattern RP3-1, 3 round control patterns RP3-2, 5 rounds. It is only necessary to store a round control pattern RP3-3 for use. The round control pattern RP1-1 is a pattern selected in response to the case where the variable display result in the special game is determined to be “big hit”. The round control pattern RP2-1 is selected corresponding to the case where the game ball enters the second specific entrance 91 in the small hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”. Pattern. The round control patterns RP3-1 to RP3-3 are obtained when the game ball enters the first specific entrance 89 in the small hit game state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”. It is a pattern selected in accordance with the determination result of the maximum number of round games (round maximum value).

  The plurality of types of round control patterns stored in the round control pattern table 240C are, for example, game control counter setting units 164 (FIG. 18) of the game control data holding area 250, as shown in FIGS. The number of rounds, which is the count value of the round number counter provided in), is composed of the big prize opening time, which is the maximum opening time of the big prize opening, and setting data and control data associated with the big prize opening to be opened Has been. For example, in each round control pattern, the big winning opening is set to “29 seconds”, and the opened big winning opening corresponds to the second big winning opening (the opening 48 provided in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47). Is set to “second”.

  The RAM 111 provided in the game control microcomputer 99 shown in FIG. 6 has a game control data holding area 250 as shown in FIG. 18 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game. Is provided. The game control data holding area 250 shown in FIG. 18 includes a general figure holding storage unit 161, a game control flag setting unit 162, a game control timer setting unit 163, a game control counter setting unit 164, and a game control buffer setting unit. 165.

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 161 is executing a conventional general-purpose game, although a condition for executing a general-purpose game by the normal symbol display device 63 by passing the game ball through the passing gate 58 is established. The hold information regarding the usual game for which variable display has not started for the reason is stored. For example, the general-purpose hold storage unit 161 associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the pass gate 58, and sets the count values from the random number generation circuit 60a and the random counter based on the passage of the game balls by the CPU 112 The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the normal map display result extracted based on this is stored as the pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 162 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that are set or cleared to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 162 includes a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, an advantageous state flag, a common figure display result flag, first and second specific ball detections. A flag is provided.

The special symbol process flag indicates which processing should be selected / executed in the special symbol process (step S16 and FIG. 24 in FIG. 21) executed to control the progress of the special symbol game in the special symbol display device 44a. Instruct. Or Hiroshizu process flag is in normal symbol display normal symbol process process executed to control the progress or the like of the Prussian view game at 63 (step S17 and FIG. 32 in FIG. 21), to be selected and executed which process Instruct.

  The jackpot flag is set to the on state corresponding to the determination result that the special chart display result, which is a variable display result in the special chart game, is “big jackpot”, while the big jackpot symbol is set as a confirmed special pattern in the special chart game. It is cleared and turned off in response to the derived display. The small hit flag is set to the on state corresponding to the determination result that the special figure display result is any one of “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, while as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game It is cleared and turned off in response to the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed.

  The advantageous state flag is set to the on state in response to being controlled to the special gaming state after the big hit gaming state is finished, while being cleared to the off state in response to the special gaming state being finished. It becomes. The universal map display result flag determines whether the universal map display result, which is a variable display result in the universal game, is “per 1st universal map”, “per 2nd universal map”, or “losing the universal map”. Results are shown.

  In the first specific ball detection flag, a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 opened by the opening / closing piece 81 in the small hit game state is indicated by the first specific entrance 89. When the first specific sphere detector 121a is detected after entering, the ON state is set. The second specific ball detection flag indicates that the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 opened by the opening / closing piece 81 in the small hit game state is the second specific entry 91. When the second specific sphere detector 121b is detected after entering, the ON state is set. Even if the first specific ball detection flag and the second specific ball detection flag are in a game state different from the small hit game state, the first specific ball detector 121a and the second specific ball detector 121b Corresponding to the detection, it may be set to the on state. Then, the presence or absence of an error may be determined according to whether or not the first specific ball detection flag or the second specific ball detection flag is on in a game state different from the small hit game state.

  The game control timer setting unit 163 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 163 stores data indicating the timer value in each timer. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 163 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a general figure variation timer, and a motor return control timer.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 120 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 120 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure fluctuation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal map change timer is for measuring, on the main board 120 side, a time for controlling the progress of the general map game, such as the normal map change time which is the execution time of the normal game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time change timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  For example, the motor return control timer rotates the rotating body 79 by driving the motor 127 in the small hit gaming state, and then returns the rotating body 79 from an arbitrary rotation position after the rotation to the initial position. It is used to measure the time for driving 127. For example, in the motor return control timer, after the rotating body 79 is rotated in the small hit gaming state, the control time for the small hit gaming state elapses and the game ball is placed inside the first special variable winning ball device 66. When it is determined that the motor does not exist, data indicating a timer value that is a driving time of the motor 127 corresponding to the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 is set. Thereafter, the motor return control timer value, which is the timer value in the motor return control timer, is counted down by periodically subtracting 1 or the like until the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position.

  The game control counter setting unit 164 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 164 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 164 is provided with a round number counter, a variable display number counter, first and second big prize opening counters, a remaining ball number counter, and a general-purpose reserved memory number counter. .

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The variable display number counter is used to count the remaining number of ordinary games that can be executed in the special gaming state or the number of ordinary games executed in the special gaming state. For example, in the variable display number counter, data indicating the number of executions of the usual game (for example, “10”) determined in advance at the end of the big hit gaming state may be set as the initial count value. In this case, each time the ordinary game is executed in the special game state, the value of the variable display number counter is decremented by 1, so that the remaining number of the ordinary game that can be executed in the special game state can be specified. Can be counted. On the other hand, the variable display number counter may be initialized as the count initial value by being initialized at the end of the big hit gaming state. In this case, each time the ordinary game is executed in the special game state, the value of the variable display number counter is incremented by 1, so that the number of the ordinary game executed in the special game state can be specified. can do. Then, the special gaming state ends in response to the value of the variable display number counter reaching a predetermined advantageous state end determination value (for example, “0” or “10”) in the special gaming state.

  The first grand prize winning counter is for counting the number of game balls won in the opening 82 as the first major winning prize provided in the first special variable prize winning ball device 66. For example, data that is incremented by 1 each time a game ball is detected by the first count switch 106 is set as the first big prize opening counter value in the first big prize opening counter. At the end of the small hit gaming state, the first big prize opening count value is cleared and data indicating the initial count value “0” is set.

  The second grand prize opening counter is for counting the number of game balls that have won the opening 48 as the second big prize opening provided in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47. For example, data that is incremented by one every time a game ball is detected by the second count switch 52 is set in the second grand prize opening counter as the second big prize opening count value. At the end of the round game in which the second big prize opening is opened and then closed in the big hit game state, the second big prize mouth count value is cleared and data indicating the initial count value “0” is set. Is done.

  The remaining ball number counter is for counting the number of game balls remaining in the first special variable winning ball device 66. For example, data that is incremented by 1 every time a game ball is detected by the first count switch 106 is set in the remaining ball number counter as the remaining ball number count value. Each time the game ball is detected by the discharge ball detector 122, the remaining ball count value is decremented by 1 and updated.

  The general-purpose reserved memory number counter is for counting the general-purpose reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the general-purpose reserved memory unit 161. For example, in the general-purpose reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the general-purpose reserved memory number is stored as a general-purpose reserved memory number count value, and is updated in accordance with an increase or decrease in the general-purpose reserved memory number (for example, 1 Addition or 1 subtraction).

  The game control buffer setting unit 165 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The effect control board 90 shown in FIG. 6 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 120, and controls the display operation of the effect display device 44b according to the effect control command from the main board 120, and also includes a voice frame. Information signals are exchanged with the lamp substrate 92. For example, an effect control microcomputer 170 and a display control unit 171 are mounted on the effect control board 90 as shown in FIG.

  An effect control microcomputer 170 shown in FIG. 19 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and provides a CPU 181 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 182 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the CPU 181. The RAM 183 includes a random number circuit 184 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 181, and an input / output port 185. In the effect control microcomputer 170, the CPU 181 executes a program read from the ROM 182 and uses the RAM 183 as a work area, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect display device 44b and the like.

  The ROM 182 of the effect control microcomputer 170 stores, for example, a plurality of types of decorative design determination tables, effect execution determination tables, and effect control patterns as readable data for performing various determinations, determinations, and settings in the control operation by the CPU 181. Data constituting various tables such as a table is stored. The decorative symbol determination table is a table used for determining a fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result of decorative symbols in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. The effect execution determination table is a table used for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect operation on the side of the effect control board 90, an effect pattern indicating an aspect of the effect operation when it is executed, and the like. The effect control pattern table is a table in which a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls such as display operations in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b are stored as effect control patterns. Each production control pattern is composed of setting data and control data for setting and controlling various production operations, and shows the contents of various production control and the timing of switching the production control in time series. Good.

  As an example of the effect control pattern table stored in the ROM 182, an effect control pattern table 300 as shown in FIG. 20 is prepared in this embodiment. For example, in the effect control pattern table 300, the setting contents in the effect control microcomputer 170 by the CPU 181 during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the stop display of the confirmed decorative design that is the display result, Display control command to be transmitted to the display control unit 171, contents of audio output control of the speakers 12a, 12b, etc., effects by the game effect LEDs 13, 14a, 14c and game effect lamps 14b, 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b, etc. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effects control, such as the contents, as the effects control pattern. Further, in the effect control pattern table 300, the period from when the special symbol variable display is started in the special symbol display device 44a until the confirmed special symbol that is the display result is stopped, or in the normal variable winning ball device 61. Even if data indicating various contents of effect control during a period during which the game ball can be guided to the start area 56, a period in which the game ball is controlled to the small hit game state or the big hit game state, is stored as an effect control pattern. Good.

  Each production control pattern is composed of various data for controlling production operations, such as production control process timer setting value, production control process timer determination value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, end code, Display control commands transmitted to the display control unit 171 in time series, audio output contents from the speakers 12a, 12b, game effect LEDs 13, 14a, 14c and game effect lamps 14b, 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, The contents of various effects such as the contents of effects by 17b, the timing for switching the effects control, and the like are set. The production control patterns are not limited to those showing the contents of various production controls, switching timings, and the like in time series, and may be listed regardless of time series. For example, each effect control pattern includes a display control command transmitted to the display control unit 171, audio output control data transmitted to the audio frame lamp board 92 corresponding to the audio output contents from the speakers 12 a and 12 b, and game effects For each of the lighting control data to be transmitted to the voice frame lamp board 92 corresponding to the contents of the effects by the LEDs 13, 14a, 14c and the game effect lamps 14b, 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b, The command to be transmitted and the setting data indicating the contents of the data may be individually associated with each other.

  In this embodiment, in response to the fact that the normal map display results are determined to be “normal map loss”, “per 1st normal map”, and “per 2nd general map”, there are different effect control patterns. It is prepared. As a result, an effect corresponding to variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 63 is executed in a different aspect depending on whether “per 1st normal symbol” or “per 2nd universal symbol” is determined. be able to.

  The RAM 183 of the effect control microcomputer 170 shown in FIG. 19 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the RAM 183 has an effect control flag setting unit that stores data for setting a plurality of types of flags that are set or cleared in accordance with the effect operation state, the effect control command, and the like, and various effects used for effect control. An effect control timer setting unit in which data indicating the timer value is stored, an effect control counter setting unit in which data indicating various count values used for effect control is stored, and various data used in effect control are temporarily stored It is only necessary to provide an area to be various data setting units such as an effect control buffer setting unit to be stored.

  The random number circuit 184 is a circuit that generates all or a part of various random number values used on the side of the effect control board 90. Note that all or a part of various random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 90 may be counted by updating by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 184 by the CPU 181. By counting the random number value by the CPU 181, even if a hardware circuit such as the random number circuit 184 fails, the random number value can be continuously counted by updating with software, so that various rendering operations are fixed. Can be prevented. When a failure occurs in the CPU 181 itself, the progress of the performance operation itself in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes uncontrollable, so that the occurrence of the failure can be recognized immediately. The input / output port 185 is an input port for capturing various signals such as a rendering control command transmitted to the rendering control microcomputer 170, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the rendering control microcomputer 170. It is comprised including. For example, a control signal indicating a display control command transmitted to the display control unit 171 or an information signal transmitted to the audio frame lamp substrate 92 is output from the output port of the input / output port 185.

  The display control unit 171 mounted on the effect control board 90 is for controlling the display operation in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b based on a display control signal from the effect control microcomputer 170 or the like. For example, the display control unit 171 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by causing the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b to perform effect image switching display. The display control unit 171 may be mounted with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  In the audio frame lamp board 92, the game effect LEDs 13, 14a, 14c and the game effect lamps 14b, 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b are turned on in accordance with the illumination signals input from the main board 120 and the effect control board 90. Control is performed. In the voice frame lamp board 92, the voice output operation of the speakers 12a and 12b is controlled in accordance with the sound effect signal input from the main board 120 and the effect control board 90. Further, in the audio frame lamp board 92, lighting control of various decoration LEDs / lamps 32 is performed via the lamp driver board 93 in accordance with the electric decoration signals input from the main board 120 and the effect control board 90. The lamp driver board 93 relays the connection from the voice frame lamp board 92 to various decorative LEDs / lamps 32.

  The payout control board 98 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 120 and controls the game ball payout operation in accordance with the award ball number signal from the main board 120 and the like. Control various display operations. For example, on the payout control board 98, a payout stop signal is output to the ball payout device 154 in accordance with a full tank signal from the full tank switch 158, and control for stopping the driving of the payout motor is performed. Further, the payout control board 98 drives a payout motor in accordance with the prize ball number signal from the main board 120 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. At this time, the payout control board 98 performs control to display and drive the prize ball LED 10 according to the prize ball number signal.

  In addition, on the payout control board 98, a payout stop signal is output to the ball payout device 154 in accordance with the ball break switch signal from the ball break switch 157, and control to stop driving of the payout motor is performed. At this time, the payout control board 98 is also controlled to display the ball-off LED 9.

  The payout control board 98 also receives signals from a motor position sensor and a payout number count switch mounted on the ball payout device 154. The payout control board 98 controls the stop position of the payout motor in the game ball payout operation in accordance with the input signal from the motor position sensor, and detects whether or not the ball payout member is operating normally. On the payout control board 98, the payout control of the game ball is performed by the drive control of the payout motor in accordance with the input signal from the payout number count switch.

  The payout control board 98 is connected to a lending device connection terminal board 103 such as a game ball that relays signals from the card unit device 128 and the balance display substrate 104, and various information from the card unit device 128 and the balance display substrate 104. A signal from a ball lending operation unit or a return operation unit mounted on the is input. On the payout control board 98, game ball payout control is performed by drive control of a payout motor in accordance with a ball lending request signal from the card unit device 128.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 120, when the power supply from the power supply board 97 is started, the game control microcomputer 99 is activated, and the CPU 112 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 112 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, it is determined whether or not the clear switch 97a mounted on the power supply board 97 is pressed. If the clear switch 97a is pressed, the RAM 111 is cleared and an initial value is set in a predetermined work area. Initial setting processing such as setting is executed. On the other hand, when the clear switch 97a is not pressed, when the checksum calculation result matches the contents of the checksum buffer based on the contents stored in the backup area of the RAM 111, etc. A recovery process for returning the internal state of the substrate 120 to the state before the power interruption occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed.

  In the game control main process, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 99 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 112 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 112 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting and recovery processing are completed, the loop processing is started after the interrupt is permitted. When the CPU 112 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the CPU 112 first executes a predetermined power-off process (step S11). In this power-off processing, the signal state in a predetermined power-supply confirmation signal is checked, and if it is not during power-off determination, the backup monitoring timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is cut off, the backup monitoring timer is updated or determined, and it is determined whether or not the power is cut off. At this time, if a power interruption occurs, predetermined settings and processing such as setting of a checksum buffer, setting of prohibiting access to the RAM 111, and monitoring of a power supply confirmation signal are executed.

  Following the power-off process, a predetermined switch process is executed (step S12). In this switch process, each switch such as the gate switch 58a, the start port switch 60, the first count switch 106, and the second count switch 52, the first specific sphere detector 121a, the second specific sphere detector 121b, and the third specific sphere. Detection signals indicating the states of the detectors 51, the normal winning ball detectors 55a to 55c, the approaching ball detector 109, and the discharged ball detector 122 are taken in, and the detection state of each switch and each detector is determined. Is called. For example, in the switch process, a winning error determination process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22 is executed.

  When the winning error determination process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is “3” (step S51). . Here, when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”, a small hit release process for performing various controls in the small hit gaming state is executed in the special symbol process process described later (FIG. 24). Step S113). In the small hit game state, a starting operation is performed in which the opening 82 serving as the first large prize opening provided in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is opened by the opening / closing piece 81, and the first special variable winning ball apparatus is provided. A game ball based on a normal game can enter inside 66. On the other hand, in a gaming state other than the small hit gaming state, the opening 82 is not controlled to be opened by the opening / closing piece 81, so that the gaming ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is entered. When is detected, it is desirable to make an error determination that an abnormality has occurred.

  Therefore, if the value of the special figure process flag is a value other than “3” in step S51 (step S51; No), the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected as an abnormal winning ball. The first error determination process is executed. That is, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is in an on state (step S52), and if it is in an off state (step S52; No), the first and second specific spheres. It is determined whether one of the detection signals from the detectors 121a and 121b is in an on state (steps S53 and S54).

  When the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is on in step S52 (step S52; Yes), or when the detection signal from the first specific sphere detector 121a is on (step S53) (step S52). S53; Yes), or when the detection signal from the second specific ball detector 121b is on in step S54 (step S54; Yes), the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 formed in the first special variable winning ball device 66 is used. A gaming ball that has improperly entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 after a predetermined effective winning detection period has elapsed after the opening 82 serving as a big winning opening has been closed. Become. Therefore, in these cases, settings are made to prohibit the payout of prize balls (step S55). For example, in the process of step S55, the CPU 112 clears the output port for transmitting the prize ball number signal to the payout control board 98 among the output ports included in the I / O 114, thereby obtaining the prize ball number signal. Stop sending. Further, the CPU 112 prohibits writing of control data for a prize ball number setting buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 165 and an output port for transmitting a prize ball number signal at the I / O 114. Avoid setting the number of award balls. Further, the CPU 112 may stop paying out prize balls for inappropriately detected game balls by transmitting a predetermined abnormality notification signal to the payout control board 98.

  After performing the process of step S55, it enters into a loop process for executing a predetermined first abnormality notification process (step S56), and controls so as not to proceed to the subsequent processes. As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped, and an illegal act performed by generating an abnormal state can be prevented. In the first abnormality notification process of step S56, for example, a predetermined notification screen such as a first abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to output a predetermined alarm sound from the speakers 12a and 12b, or to combine them so that the abnormality can be notified.

  Further, when the value of the special figure process flag is a value other than “3” in step S51, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the discharge ball detector 122 is in the on state. Alternatively, the process may proceed to steps S55 and S56. Thereby, in a game state other than the small hit game state, an error determination that an abnormality has occurred when the game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected by the discharge ball detector 122. It can be performed.

  If the value of the special figure process flag is “3” in step S51, or if the detection signal from the second specific sphere detector 121b is OFF in step S54 (step S54; No), It is determined whether or not the value of the figure process flag is equal to or greater than “4” (step S57). Here, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” or more, processing for performing various controls in the big hit gaming state is executed in the special symbol process processing described later (steps S114 to S117 in FIG. 24). ). In the big hit gaming state, a round game is performed in which the opening 48 serving as the second big prize opening provided in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is opened by the opening / closing plate 49, and the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47. A game ball based on a normal game can enter the inside. On the other hand, in the gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, the opening portion 48 is not controlled to be opened by the opening / closing plate 49, so that the gaming ball that has entered the second special variable winning ball device 47 is If detected, it is desirable to make an error determination to the effect that an abnormality has occurred.

  Therefore, if the value of the special figure process flag is less than “4” in step S57 (step S57; No), the game ball that has entered the second special variable winning ball device 47 is detected as an abnormal winning ball. A second error determination process is executed. That is, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the detection signal from the second count switch 52 is on (step S58).

  If the detection signal from the second count switch 52 is in the on state in step S58 (step S58; Yes), the opening 48 as the second big prize opening formed in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47. After the game is closed, a game ball that has improperly entered the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is detected. Therefore, in this case, the setting for prohibiting the payout of prize balls is performed in the same manner as in the process of step S55 (step S59). Subsequently, a loop process for executing a predetermined second abnormality notification process is started (step S60), and control is performed so as not to proceed to the subsequent processes. As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped, and an illegal act performed by generating an abnormal state can be prevented. In the second abnormality notification process in step S60, for example, a predetermined notification screen such as a second abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23B is displayed on the effect display device 44b, or all the upper decoration units 22 are turned on. It is only necessary to output a predetermined warning sound from the speakers 12a and 12b, or to combine them so that an abnormality can be reported.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is “4” or more at step S57 (step S57; Yes), or when the detection signal from the second count switch 52 is OFF at step S58 (step S58). No), it is determined whether or not the value of the general process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is “4” (step S61). Here, when the value of the ordinary process flag is “4”, the ordinary induction member solenoid 59 provided in the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 is driven in the ordinary symbol process processing to be described later to drive the variable induction member 61a. As a result, the game ball can enter the start area 56. On the other hand, during the period in which the value of the normal process flag is a value other than “4”, the control for allowing the game ball to enter the start area 56 is not performed. When is detected, it is desirable to perform an error determination that an abnormality has occurred.

  Therefore, if the value of the normal process flag is a value other than “4” in step S61 (step S61; No), a third error for detecting a game ball that has entered the start area 56 as an abnormal winning ball. Execute the judgment process. That is, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is on (step S62). On the other hand, if the value of the normal process flag is “4” in step S61 (step S61; Yes), the winning error determination process is terminated.

  If the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in the on state in step S62 (step S62; Yes), the game that has improperly entered the start area 56 during a period in which the game ball cannot enter the start area 56. A sphere has been detected. Therefore, in this case, the setting for prohibiting the payout of the prize ball is performed in the same manner as the processing of step S55 and step S59 (step S63). Subsequently, a loop process for executing a predetermined third abnormality notification process is started (step S64), and control is performed so as not to proceed to the subsequent processes. As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped, and an illegal act performed by generating an abnormal state can be prevented. In the third abnormality notification process of step S64, for example, a predetermined notification screen such as a third abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23C is displayed on the effect display device 44b, or all the upper decoration units 22 are turned on. It is only necessary to output a predetermined warning sound from the speakers 12a and 12b, or to combine them so that an abnormality can be reported.

  The first abnormality notification process executed in step S56, the second abnormality notification process executed in step S60, and the third abnormality notification process executed in step S64 are performed when power supply from the power supply board 97 is stopped. That is, it may be repeated until the power is cut off. In this case, when the power is cut off, the pressing operation of the clear switch 97a is performed when the power is turned on again, so that the initialization process is executed after the RAM 111 is cleared, and the abnormal state is cleared (released). That's fine. On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the notification of abnormality may be terminated even if the clear switch 97a is not pressed when the power is turned on again. Thereby, since it is not necessary to input a special signal to the main board 120 in order to clear (cancel) the abnormal state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an illegal signal is input.

  The first abnormality notification process executed in step S56, the second abnormality notification process executed in step S60, and the third abnormality notification process executed in step S64 have a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The process may be repeated until the time elapses, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, it may be automatically recovered from the abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify an amusement hall clerk or the like that an abnormal state has occurred, while the abnormal state does not occur even if the RAM 111 is not cleared by pressing the clear switch 97a or turning on the power again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage given to the player when it is determined as an abnormal state due to noise or the like. Or in the 1st abnormality information processing performed in Step S56, the 2nd abnormality information processing performed in Step S60, and the 3rd abnormality information processing performed in Step S64, for example with respect to production control board 90 After sending an effect control command that becomes an error command to notify the occurrence of an error, the winning error determination process may be terminated without entering the loop process.

  In the process of step S <b> 51, it may be determined whether or not the opening 82 is open by the opening / closing piece 81 based on the detection result of the operation monitoring sensor in the opening / closing piece 81. In this case, the process proceeds to step S57 in response to the determination that the opening 82 is in the open state, while step S52 corresponds to the determination that the opening 82 is in the closed state. You can proceed to the process. Further, in the process of step S57, it may be determined whether or not the opening 48 is opened by the opening / closing plate 49 based on the detection result by the operation monitoring sensor in the opening / closing plate 49. In this case, the process proceeds to step S61 in response to the determination that the opening 48 is in the open state, while step S58 corresponds to the determination that the opening 48 is in the closed state. You can proceed to the process. Further, in the process of step S61, it is determined whether or not the variable guiding member 61a has advanced and the game ball can enter the starting area 56 based on the detection result of the operation monitoring sensor in the variable guiding member 61a. You may do it. In this case, in response to the determination that the variable guiding member 61a has advanced, the winning error determination process is terminated, while the variable guiding member 61a is determined to be retracted. Then, the process may proceed to step S62.

  In addition, in the switch processing in step S12, it is determined whether any of various sensors such as a magnet sensor, a radio wave sensor, or a vibration sensor provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has detected an illegal act or an illegal operation. If the determination is made, the process for notifying the abnormality is executed in the same manner as the first abnormality notification process in step S56, the second abnormality notification process in step S60, or the third abnormality notification process in step S64. You may be made to do. Further, when it is detected that the opening 82 is opened by the operation monitoring sensor in the opening / closing piece 81 during the period in which the driving of the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is stopped, When it is detected by the operation monitoring sensor in the opening / closing plate 49 during the period when the driving of the door solenoid 65 is stopped, or when the opening 48 is detected to be open, or the solenoid 59 for an ordinary electric accessory Even when it is detected that the variable guiding member 61a is in the advanced position by the operation monitoring sensor in the variable guiding member 61a during the period in which the driving of the first guiding member is stopped, the first abnormality notification process in step S56 or the step Similar to the second abnormality notification process in S60 or the third abnormality notification process in step S64, a process for notifying abnormality may be executed.

  After the switch process is executed in step S12 shown in FIG. 21, the display control process is executed (step S13). In this display control processing, a drive signal for controlling the display operation in the special symbol display device 44a and the normal symbol display device 63, a drive signal for controlling the lighting operation in the normal symbol start memory LED 64, etc. Output to LED. When the display control process ends, a random number update process is executed (step S14). In this random number update process, the CPU 112 updates numerical data for generating various random number values by software.

  After the random number update process, an initial value determination random number update process is executed (step S15). In this initial value determination random number update process, random numbers used to determine initial values of various random values are updated. When the initial value determination random number update process is completed, a special symbol process is executed (step S16). In this special symbol process, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the value corresponding to the value of the special figure process flag is updated. Various settings for variably displaying the special symbols by the special symbol display device 44a, various settings for controlling the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening in the first and second special variable winning ball devices 66 and 47, and the like are performed. . Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S17). In this normal symbol process, the value of the general process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the value corresponding to the value of the general process flag is changed. Various settings for variably displaying the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 63, various settings for driving the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory provided in the ordinary variable winning ball device 61, and the like are performed.

  When the normal symbol process is completed, the display command control process is executed (step S18). In this display command control process, an effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 in order to control various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. Following the display command control process, an information output process is executed (step S19). In this information output processing, various game information in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to the hall management computer installed in the game hall via the board external terminal board 96 and the like. After the information output process, a prize ball process is executed (step S20). In this prize ball processing, the prize ball number is set by outputting a prize ball number signal to the payout control board 98 in accordance with detection signals from each switch and each detector. As a specific example, in the prize ball processing in step S20, when the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is on, the number of prize balls is set to “4” while the second count is set. When the detection signal from the switch 52 is in the ON state, the number of prize balls is set to “15”. When the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in the on state, the number of winning balls is set to “12”, and any of the detection signals from the normal winning ball detectors 55a to 55c is in the on state. Is set to “10”.

  Subsequent to the winning ball process, a test terminal process is executed (step S21). In this test terminal processing, for example, settings during normal symbol variable display or special symbol variable display, settings corresponding to the occurrence of “per normal symbol”, “big hit” or “small hit”, the first special variable winning ball device 66 Various settings such as a setting during the start operation at the time of the operation, a setting during a round game with the second special variable winning ball device 47, and a setting during driving of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 59 in the normal variable winning ball device 61 are shown. The signal is output from, for example, a test terminal provided on the board external terminal board 96. After the test terminal process, an output process is executed (step S22). In this output process, in order to drive or stop the solenoids 50, 59, 65, 105, 108, 118 and the motor 127, for example, steps S243, S246, S248, S250, S258 (described above, FIG. 27) and S144 described later are used. While the drive control signal is output based on the setting in (FIG. 32), the output of the drive control signal is stopped based on the settings in steps S254, S256, S260 (above, FIG. 27) and S144 (FIG. 32). The When the output process ends, a storage process is executed (step S23). In this storage process, for example, a drive signal for controlling the lighting operation in the normal symbol start storage LED 64 is set.

  After the storage process, a motor initial position return control process is executed (step S24). In this motor initial position return control process, after the motor 127 is driven and the rotating body 79 is rotated in the small hit gaming state, the determination result that there is no gaming ball inside the first special variable winning ball device 66 Based on this, when the small hit gaming state is ended, a drive signal for driving the motor 127 is set until the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position. Subsequent to the motor initial position return control process, a special symbol display control process is executed (step S25). In the special symbol display control process, a drive signal for controlling the display operation in the special symbol display device 44a is set. When the special symbol display control process ends, the normal symbol display control process is executed (step S26). In this normal symbol display control process, a drive signal for controlling the display operation in the normal symbol display device 63 is set. Subsequent to the normal symbol display control process, a status indicator control process is executed (step S27). In this status indicator lamp control process, display operation of a predetermined status indicator lamp is controlled. When the status indicator control process ends, the interrupt permission state is set (step S28), and the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S16 shown in FIG. 21 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 112 executes the following steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the special symbol display device 44a starts a special symbol game based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the starting area 56 is detected by the starting port switch 60 provided in the normal variable winning ball device 61. It is determined whether or not to do so. In the special symbol normal process, the special symbol display result as the variable display result in the special symbol game is determined to be “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Determination such as “small hit” to “fourth small hit” is performed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a stop symbol (determined special symbol) in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 44a is determined corresponding to the special symbol display result. In the special symbol possible normal process, the special symbol change start command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 as the effect control command corresponding to the start of the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 44a. Settings are made. On the side of the effect control board 90, a message such as a special figure change effect (for example, “big hit” or “relaxation!”) Executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol based on the reception of the special figure change start command. It is only necessary to make a setting for starting an effect operation that displays an effect image indicating the effect image in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b.

  The special symbol variation process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “1”. In this special symbol variation process, setting for varying the special symbol is performed in the special symbol display device 44a, and the elapsed time from the start of variation of the special symbol is measured. In addition, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a special figure fluctuation time determined corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern. When the special symbol variation time is reached, the special symbol display device 44a performs setting for stopping and displaying the confirmed special symbol. At this time, the special symbol display device 44a may be set to transmit a special symbol change end command to the effect control board 90 as an effect control command corresponding to the end of the change of the special symbol. Good. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 90, setting for ending the effect at the time of special figure change may be made based on the reception of the special figure change end command. Alternatively, transmission of the special figure change end command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 may not be performed. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 90, the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated in the special figure fluctuation start command is specified, and the elapsed time after receiving the special figure fluctuation start command. When the specified special figure variation time is reached, a setting for ending the effect executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 120. You can do that. After such various settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol stop process, it is determined whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is turned on. If the big hit flag is turned on, a special figure process is performed. The value of the flag is updated to “4”. If the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. In addition, as a special figure display result, when there is “special figure loss” other than “big hit” or “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off. Correspondingly, the value of the special figure process flag may be updated to “0”.

  The small hit release process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this small hit opening process, an opening as a first big prize opening provided in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 in response to the variable display result in the special game being “small hit”. Control is performed to bring 82 into an open state by a starting operation. In the small hit release process, various settings and controls are executed according to the small hit control pattern.

  The big hit pre-release processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit release pre-processing, a game that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 that has been opened by the starting operation, as a result of the variable display in the special game is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the ball has entered the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 as a specific area, a setting for starting a round game in the big hit gaming state is performed. For example, in the big hit release pre-processing in step S114, after waiting until a predetermined big hit game start waiting time elapses, the initial count value in the round hit counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 164 is the first in the big hit gaming state. The process of setting “1” corresponding to the execution of the round game is updated and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, in the round game executed in the big hit game state, the opening 48 as the second big prize opening provided in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is opened by the opening / closing plate 49. Settings are made. In the big hit opening process, the elapsed time after the opening 48 is in the open state is measured, and it is determined whether or not the elapsed time has reached the opening end time corresponding to the big winning opening opening determination value. Is called. Further, in the big hit opening process, it is determined whether or not the second big prize opening count value, which is the count value in the second big prize opening counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 164, has reached the opening completion determination value. Is also done. When the elapsed time reaches the opening end time, or when the second big prize opening count value reaches the opening completion judgment value, the opening 48 as the second big winning opening is closed by the opening / closing plate 49. And a process for updating the value of the special figure process flag to “6” is executed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the processing after the big hit release, it is determined whether or not to shift to the next round game in the big hit gaming state, and when changing, setting for starting the next round game is performed. For example, in the processing after the jackpot release, it is determined whether or not the round number count value, which is the count value in the round number counter, has reached the maximum round value as the maximum continuation count. A process of updating the value of the special figure process flag to “5” and the like are executed while being updated by adding 1 to the count value. In this case, the condition for the transition to the next round game is that the second grand prize opening count value is “1” or more and that the game ball is detected by the third specific ball detector 51. Also good. Or, regardless of whether or not a game ball is detected by the second big prize opening count value or the third specific ball detector 51, it is possible to proceed to the next round game until the round number count value reaches the maximum round value. You may do it. If the round number count value has reached the maximum round value, the round number counter is cleared and initialized, and the effect control command for the effect control board 90 corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is a big hit. Settings for transmitting the end command, processing for updating the special figure process flag to “7”, and the like are executed.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, after various settings and control at the end of the jackpot gaming state are performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the start area 56 by determining whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in an ON state. A determination is made (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in an OFF state (step S201; No), the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is.

  If the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in the on state in step S201 (step S201; Yes), for example, by extracting numerical data that can be updated by the random number generation circuit 60a, the special signal is extracted. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result is acquired (step S202). Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 200 as shown in FIG. 8 based on the random value MR1 acquired in step S202, the special figure display result as a variable display result in the special figure game is determined. This is performed (step S203). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 may be set to the on state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure display result is either “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is turned on. Set to.

  After determining the special figure display result in step S203, the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special figure display result is determined by referring to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 220 shown in FIG. 10 (step S204). ). Subsequently, the CPU 112 determines whether or not it is determined in step S203 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, for example, by determining whether or not the small hit flag is on. It performs (step S205). At this time, if it is determined to be “small hit” (step S205; Yes), the start interval time is determined (step S206). Here, the start interval time is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the start area 56 is detected by the start port switch 60, and the special figure display result is “ This is the time until the opening 82 serving as the first big winning opening is opened by the starting operation in the small hit gaming state corresponding to “small hit”. For example, in the process of step S206, as shown in FIG. 25B, the CPU 112 determines a start interval time associated in advance with a special figure display result from “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. To do. The timer initial value corresponding to the start interval time determined in this way may be set to a predetermined timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 163 such as a start waiting time timer. In this case, every time the special symbol variation process in step S111 shown in FIG. 24, the special symbol stop process in step S112, or the small hit release process in step S113 is executed, for example, the value of the start waiting time timer is set. The value may be updated so that 1 is subtracted, and until the value becomes “0”, the opening portion 82 serving as the first big prize opening may be restricted from being opened. That is, output of the drive signal from the switch relay board 95 to the open / close piece solenoid 105 may be prohibited until the start interval time elapses. The update of the start waiting time timer value may be performed by at least one of a special symbol variation process, a special symbol stop process, and a small hit release process, or by any two processes. It may be broken.

  When the special figure display result is other than “small hit” in step S205 (step S205; No), or after executing the process in step S206, the special figure display result determined in the process in step S203 is handled. The confirmed special symbol to be set is set as a scheduled stop symbol in the special symbol game in which the start condition is satisfied (step S207). As an example, in the process of step S207, the CPU 112 identifies the confirmed special symbol corresponding to the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table 200 as shown in FIG. The data indicating the special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 111 such as a confirmed special symbol buffer of the game control buffer setting unit 165, thereby setting the scheduled stop symbol.

  After the scheduled stop symbol is set in step S207, the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S204 is set (step S208). As an example, in the process of step S208, the CPU 112 specifies and specifies the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern by referring to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 220 as shown in FIG. The timer initial value corresponding to the special figure change time is set in a special figure change timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 163. In this case, every time the special symbol variation process in step S111 shown in FIG. 24 is executed, for example, the special symbol variation timer value is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the value becomes “0”. Then, it may be determined that the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation has reached the special symbol variation time. Alternatively, in the processing of step S208, by clearing the special figure fluctuation timer, “0” may be set as the timer initial value, and a special figure fluctuation end determination value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time may be set. . In this case, every time the special symbol variation process of step S111 shown in FIG. 24 is executed, for example, the value of the special symbol variation timer is updated to be incremented by 1, and the value reaches the special diagram variation end determination value. In this case, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation has reached the special symbol variation time.

  After the special figure change time is set in step S208, a setting for transmitting a special figure change start command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 is made (step S209). Here, the special figure change start command is the special figure display result determined in the process of step S203, the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S204, or the special figure set in the process of step S208. An effect control command indicating a change time or the like may be used. For example, in the process of step S209, the CPU 112 sets the head address of the table data constituting the special figure variation start command table stored in the ROM 100 to a transmission command pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 111 or the like. When the setting in step S209 is performed in this way, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. 21 is executed after the special symbol normal process is completed, so that the main board 120 applies to the effect control board 90. Thus, a special figure change start command is transmitted. In addition to the special figure change start command, an effect control command indicating a special figure display result may be transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90. However, since the special figure display result is indicated by the special figure change start command, it is not necessary to separately transmit the production control command indicating the special figure display result, so that the main board 120 transmits to the production control board 90. It is possible to reduce the number of effect control commands to be performed, and to reduce the control burden on the main board 120 and the capacity of stored data. Based on the special figure change start command transmitted from the main board 120 to the production control board 90 in this way, a predetermined production operation that becomes the special figure fluctuation production may be started. The special figure change start command for which transmission setting is performed in the process of step S209 is variable in the normal game, such as whether the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd normal map”. Depending on which type of display result the game ball that has entered the start area 56 is detected by the start port switch 60, the display result may be different. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 90, it corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game, depending on when the type of the variable display result in the normal game is in the start area 56 The effect executed when the special drawing is changed may be made different. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, and the usual figure display result indicated by the special figure change start command is “per second figure”, the first special variable prize is awarded. You may make it perform the production | presentation operation | movement which the opening part 82 provided in the ball | bowl apparatus 66 opens suddenly.

  After the transmission setting of the special figure change start command is performed in step S209, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol change process (step S210), and then the special symbol is changed. Normal processing ends.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S112 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S221). At this time, if the big hit flag is ON (step S221; Yes), the round control pattern RP1-1 corresponding to the special figure display result being “big hit” is set (step S222). As a result, the round control pattern RP1-1 for 15 rounds is set in response to the determined special symbol in the special game being determined as the jackpot symbol “77”.

  Subsequent to the process of step S222, setting for transmitting a big hit start command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 is performed (step S223). For example, in the process of step S223, the CPU 112 sets the start address of the table data constituting the jackpot start command table stored in the ROM 100 in the transmission command pointer. When the setting in step S223 is performed in this manner, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. 21 is executed after the special symbol stop process is completed, so that the main board 120 applies to the effect control board 90. The jackpot start command is transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S223, a big hit game start waiting time is set (step S224). For example, in the process of step S224, the CPU 112 sets a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit game start waiting time in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 163. In this case, every time the big hit release pre-processing of step S114 shown in FIG. 24 is executed, for example, the value of the game control process timer is updated to be decremented by 1, and the value becomes “0”. After the setting and control for starting the first round game in the big hit gaming state, the value of the special figure process flag may be updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release processing. Alternatively, in the process of step S224, the game control process timer is reset to set the timer value to “0”, and the jackpot game start reference value that is determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot game start waiting time is set to the game control process. You may set as a comparison object with a timer value. In this case, every time the big hit release pre-processing in step S114 shown in FIG. 24 is executed, for example, the value of the game control process timer is updated to be incremented by 1, and the value has reached the big hit game start reference value. Sometimes, after setting or controlling to start the first round game in the big hit game state, the value of the special figure process flag may be updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release processing. .

  After the big hit game start waiting time is set in step S224, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S225), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing "4". "" (Step S226), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S221 (step S221; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S227). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S227; Yes), the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type is set (step S228). In the process of step S228, the special figure display result is changed from “first small hit” to “fourth small hit” by referring to the special figure display result determination table 200 shown in FIG. 8 in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. When it is determined that any one of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 is set corresponding to the small hit type that is the special figure display result.

  Subsequent to the process of step S228, setting for transmitting a small hitting start command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 is performed (step S229). For example, in the process of step S229, the CPU 112 sets the start address of the table data constituting the small hitting start command table stored in the ROM 100 in the transmission command pointer. When the setting in step S229 is performed in this way, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. 21 is executed after the special symbol stop process is completed, so that the main board 120 controls the effect control board 90. Thus, a small hit start command is transmitted.

  Subsequent to the setting in step S229, the small hit game control time is set (step S230). For example, in the process of step S230, the CPU 112 resets the game control process timer and sets the timer value to “0”, and sets a predetermined small hit game end reference value corresponding to the small hit game control time. The game control process timer value is set as a comparison target. The small hit game end reference value set at this time is compared with the game control process timer value in the small hit release process executed in step S113 of FIG. For example, the reference value for the end of the small hit game is that the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 from the opening 82 that has been opened by the starting operation after the start of the small hit game state is the first. Any timer reference value corresponding to a sufficient time until it is detected by the count switch 106 may be used. That is, the small hit game end reference value is the small hit game when the first count switch 106 does not detect a game ball even if the opening 82 is opened and then closed in the small hit game state. The upper limit of the period from the start of the state to the end is shown. In addition, in the process of step S229, the game stop corresponding to the period until the progress of the game is stopped when the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 in the small hit game state is not discharged to the outside. An initial setting of the determination value may be performed. This game stop determination value can be updated in the process of step S504 shown in FIG. 29 described later, and is compared with the game control process timer value in the process of step S269 shown in FIG.

  After setting the small hit game control time in step S230, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S231), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the processing at the time of the small hit release. After updating to “3” (step S232), the special symbol stop process is terminated. If the small hit flag is off in step S227 (step S227; No), the special symbol process flag value is updated to “0” (step S233), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the special figure display result is determined to be either “big hit” or “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, the big hit flag is turned off in step S221. In such a case, the process may proceed to step S228 without executing the process of step S227. Alternatively, when it is determined in step S227 that the small hit flag is off, it is determined that the setting of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is inappropriate and predetermined error processing is executed. Good.

  27 and 28 are flowcharts showing an example of the small hit release process executed in step S113 of FIG. In this small hit release process, the CPU 112 first updates the game control process timer value, for example, by adding 1 (step S241 in FIG. 27). For example, after the game control process timer value is set to “0” in step S230 of FIG. 26 and updated every time the process of step S241 is executed, the game control process timer value corresponds to the elapsed time in the small hit gaming state. A value can be indicated.

  After executing the process of step S241, various settings and controls corresponding to the updated game control process timer value are performed. At this time, various settings and control contents are determined according to the small hit control pattern set in step S228 of FIG.

  For example, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the big winning opening release determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S242). The winning prize opening start determination value includes the time from when the game ball enters the start area 56 until the opening 82 is opened by the start operation, including the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game. The time is set to be longer than the time required for the rotating body 79 to return to the initial position after the end of the small hit gaming state. As an example, the maximum required time until the rotating body 79 returns from the arbitrary rotation position after the rotation to the initial position is “5.0 seconds”, and the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”. When the shortest special figure change time in the game is “5.0 seconds”, the game corresponding to “1.0 seconds” as the time for starting the small hit gaming state as the big prize opening opening determination value If a determination value indicating the control process timer value is set, the time from when the special game is started due to the game ball entering the start area 56 until the opening 82 is opened by the start operation is “ 6.0 seconds "or more, and can be longer than the maximum required time" 5.0 seconds "for the rotating body 79 to return to the initial one. Here, when the start operation for opening the opening 82 in the small hit gaming state is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of large control corresponding to a plurality of different game control process timer values in the small hit control pattern are performed. A winning opening opening determination value is set. In this case, in the process of step S242, if the game control process timer value matches any one of the plurality of large winning opening opening determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the large winning opening opening determination value is obtained. It is determined that they match.

  If the game control process timer value matches the big prize opening opening determination value in step S242 (step S242; Yes), the opening serving as the first big prize opening provided in the first special variable winning ball device 66. The start setting of the operation for opening and closing the part 82 by the opening / closing piece 81 is performed (step S243). In the process of step S243, the open / close piece 81 is moved in the direction to open the opening 82 by driving the open / close piece solenoid 105 with the drive pattern indicated by the big prize opening opening control data included in the small hit control pattern. A drive control signal is generated so as to start the starting operation to be rotated. Following the processing of step S243, a first effect start command, which is an effect control command for instructing the start of the effect operation for notifying that the first grand prize winning opening is opened by the start operation, is sent to the effect control board 90. Are set for transmission (step S244). For example, in the process of step S244, the CPU 112 sets the start address of the table data constituting the first effect start command table stored in the ROM 100 as the transmission command pointer. When the setting in step S244 is performed in this manner, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. 21 is executed after the small hit release process is completed, so that the main board 120 changes to the effect control board 90. On the other hand, the first effect start command is transmitted. When the game control process timer value does not coincide with the big winning opening opening determination value in step S242 (step S242; No), the processes in steps S243 and S244 are skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the distribution drive determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S245). Here, when the sorting member 83 is changed between the first sorting state and the second sorting state a plurality of times in the small hit game state, a plurality of game control process timers different in the small hit control pattern A plurality of distribution drive determination values corresponding to the values are set. In this case, in the process of step S245, if the game control process timer value matches one of the plurality of distribution drive determination values set in the small hit control pattern, it is determined that the distribution drive determination value matches. Is made. For example, the distribution drive determination value for first driving the distribution solenoid 108 in the small hit gaming state and first setting the distribution member 83 to the second distribution state is first opened in step S242. The game control process timer value may be the same as the big prize opening opening determination value for setting the part 82 in the open state. In this case, at the timing when the opening 82 is opened by the start operation in the small hit game state, the driving of the sorting solenoid 108 is started and the game that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is entered. The sphere can be distributed to the second region 88. Alternatively, in the small hit game state, the distribution drive determination value for first driving the distribution solenoid 108 and first setting the distribution member 83 to the second distribution state is first opened in step S242. The game control process timer value larger than the big winning opening opening determination value for putting the part 82 into the open state may be indicated. In this case, the drive of the distribution solenoid 108 is started at a timing later than the timing at which the opening 82 is opened in the start operation in the small hit gaming state. For example, even if the opening 82 is opened by the starting operation in the small hit gaming state before the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position, the rotating body 79 is used for distribution until the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position. The driving of the solenoid 108 is stopped, the distribution member 83 is set to the first distribution state, and the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 are distributed to the first area 85, whereby the second area In 88, control is performed so that the game balls are not distributed, and after the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position, the distribution solenoid 108 is started to drive the distribution member 83 in the second distribution state. The game balls that have entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 may be distributed to the second area 88.

  If the game control process timer value matches the distribution drive determination value in step S245 (step S245; Yes), the distribution member 83 is moved in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the driving force of the distribution solenoid 108. Settings for moving to the back side are performed (step S246). For example, in the process of step S246, the distribution drive control data included in the small hit control pattern is read, and the drive solenoid signal is generated according to the read data, thereby driving the distribution solenoid 108. If the game control process timer value does not match the distribution drive determination value in step S245 (step S245; No), the process of step S246 is skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the motor drive start determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S247). For example, the motor drive start determination value may indicate the same game control process timer value as the big prize opening opening determination value for first opening the opening 82 in step S242. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 79 by the driving of the motor 127 can be started at the timing when the opening 82 is opened in the start operation in the small hit gaming state. Alternatively, the motor drive start determination value may indicate a game control process timer value that is larger than the big prize opening opening determination value for first opening the opening 82 in step S242. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 79 by the drive of the motor 127 is started at a timing later than the timing at which the opening 82 is first opened by the starting operation in the small hit gaming state. Thereby, for example, even when the opening 82 is opened by the start operation in the small hit gaming state before the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position, the game is not performed until the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position. Drive control for returning the rotating body 79 to the initial position is performed so that the control process timer value does not coincide with the motor drive start determination value, and after the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position, the motor 127 in the small hit gaming state. You may enable it to start rotation of the rotary body 79 by this drive.

  If the game control process timer value matches the motor drive start determination value in step S247 (step S247; Yes), the start setting of the operation for rotating the rotating body 79 by the driving force of the motor 127 is performed (step S248). ). For example, in the process of step S248, the motor 127 is driven with the drive pattern indicated by the motor drive start control data included in the small hit control pattern, and the rotating body 79 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (forward) indicated by the arrow A21 in FIG. Direction) or a drive control signal is generated so as to rotate in the reverse rotation direction (reverse direction) indicated by the arrow A22. If the game control process timer value does not match the motor drive start determination value in step S247 (step S247; No), the process of step S248 is skipped.

  Thereafter, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the game control process timer value matches the storage drive start determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S249). For example, the storage drive start determination value may indicate the same game control process timer value as the special winning opening opening determination value for first opening the opening 82 in step S242. In this case, at the timing when the opening 82 is opened in the starting operation in the small hit gaming state, the storage solenoid 118 can be started to drive the storage plate 118b. Alternatively, even if the storage drive start determination value indicates a game control process timer value larger than the big prize opening opening determination value for first opening the opening 82 in step S242, the start operation Any game control process timer value corresponding to a time shorter than the shortest required time required for the game ball that has entered the opening 82 that has been opened to reach the installation position of the storage plate 118b may be used. .

  If the game control process timer value matches the storage drive start determination value in step S249 (step S249; Yes), the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is driven by the driving force of the storage solenoid 118. Is set to move (advance) to the storage state (step S250). For example, in the process of step S250, the storage solenoid 118 is driven by reading storage drive start control data included in the small hit control pattern and generating a drive control signal according to the read data. Subsequent to the processing in step S250, a storage release determination value used to determine whether or not the drive time from when the storage solenoid 118 is driven to when it is stopped has been set (step S251). For example, as the storage release determination value set at this time, based on the current game control process timer value, the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is moved to the second area 88 by the distribution member 83. When it is determined that the allocation is made, a timer determination value corresponding to a sufficient time until the entry ball detector 109 detects the entry ball through the approach ball guide passage 110, the sorting member 83, and the second guide passage 117 is set. Just do it. Then, the storage cancellation determination value set in step S251 is set again when the process of step S507 (FIG. 29) described later is executed based on the detection of the game ball by the approaching ball detector 109. (Updated). As a result, when a plurality of game balls enter the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91, which are specific areas, the round control pattern is determined corresponding to the first game ball entered, It is possible to preferentially determine a round control pattern corresponding to the game ball entering the second specific entrance 91 that is advantageous to the player compared to the 1 specific entrance 89. If the game control process timer value is updated after setting in step S251, and the storage release determination value set in step S251 matches the game control process timer value, even if the first special variable Even if a game ball enters the inside of the winning ball device 66, it can be determined that the game ball has not been distributed to the second area 88 side by the distribution member 83. In addition, you may make it use the storage cancellation | release determination value shown by the small hit control pattern, without setting the storage cancellation | release determination value by the process of step S251.

  If the game control process timer value does not match the storage drive start determination value in step S249 (step S249; No), the processing in steps S250 and S251 is skipped. Thereafter, by executing the first grand prize opening entry process, various settings when the game ball enters the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 from the opening 82 serving as the first big prize opening, Control is performed (step S252).

  After executing the first big prize opening entry process in step S252, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the distribution stop determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S253). . Here, when the sorting member 83 is changed between the first sorting state and the second sorting state a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state, a plurality of game control process timers different in the small hit control pattern A plurality of sorting stop determination values corresponding to the values are set. In this case, in the process of step S253, if the game control process timer value matches one of the plurality of distribution stop determination values set in the small hit control pattern, it is determined that the distribution stop determination value matches. Is made. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the distribution solenoid 108 is driven to place the distribution member 83 in the second distribution state, and then the distribution solenoid 108 is stopped to drive the distribution member 83 to the first distribution state. The distribution stop determination value for returning to the distribution state indicates a game control process timer value larger than the distribution drive determination value for setting the distribution member 83 to the second distribution state in the process of step S245. It only has to be. And if it matches with the distribution stop determination value (step S253; Yes), the setting for stopping the driving of the distribution solenoid 108 and moving the distribution member 83 to the near side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. Is performed (step S254). In the process of step S254, the distribution stop control data included in the small hit control pattern is read, and the drive of the distribution solenoid 108 is stopped by stopping the output of the drive control signal in accordance with the read data. If the game control process timer value does not match the distribution stop determination value in step S253 (step S253; No), the process of step S254 is skipped.

  After this, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the big winning opening opening determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S255). Here, when the start operation for opening and closing the opening 82 is performed a plurality of times in the small hit game state, a plurality of big prize opening opening corresponding to a plurality of different game control process timer values in the small hit control pattern An end judgment value is set. In this case, in the process of step S255, if the game control process timer value matches any one of a plurality of large winning opening opening determination values set in the small hit control pattern, the large winning opening opening determination value is obtained. A determination is made that they match. For example, in order to return the opening 82 to the closed state by stopping the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 after the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is first driven to first open the opening 82 in the small hit gaming state. The large winning opening opening end determination value may be a game control process timer value that is larger than the large winning opening opening determination value for first opening the opening 82 in step S242. Further, in the small hit game state, the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is driven a second time to open the opening 82, and then the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is stopped to close the opening 82. The large winning opening opening determination value for returning may be a game control process timer value larger than the large winning opening opening determination value for making the opening 82 open for the second time in step S242. . Then, if it coincides with the winning opening opening end determination value (step S255; Yes), the driving of the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is stopped and the starting operation as the opening / closing operation of the first winning opening by the opening / closing piece 81 is ended. For this purpose (step S256). In the process of step S256, the driving of the solenoid 105 for the opening / closing piece is stopped by reading out the big winning opening opening control data included in the small hitting control pattern and stopping the output of the drive control signal in accordance with the read data. Let If the game control process timer value does not coincide with the big winning opening opening determination value in step S255 (step S255; No), the process of step S256 is skipped.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the motor drive switching determination value indicated in the small hit control pattern (step S257). Here, when the rotation direction of the rotating body 79 is switched multiple times between the forward direction and the reverse direction in the small hit game state, a plurality of game control process timer values corresponding to a plurality of different game control process timer values in the small hit control pattern. A motor drive switching determination value is set. In this case, in the process of step S257, if the game control process timer value matches one of the plurality of motor drive switching determination values set in the small hit control pattern, it is determined that the motor drive switching determination value matches. Is made. On the other hand, in the small hit gaming state, when the rotating body 79 is continuously rotated in one of the forward direction and the reverse direction without switching the rotation direction, the motor is driven by the small hit control pattern. The switching determination value is not set, and it is not determined that it matches the motor drive switching determination value in step S257. For example, the motor drive switching determination value only needs to indicate a game control process timer value larger than the motor drive start determination value for starting rotation of the rotating body 79 by driving the motor 127 in step S247. In this case, the motor drive switching determination value indicates a game control process timer value that is greater than the big prize opening opening determination value for first opening the opening 82 in step S242.

  If the game control process timer value matches the motor drive switching determination value in step S257 (step S257; Yes), the switching setting of the operation for rotating the rotating body 79 by the driving force of the motor 127 is performed (step S258). ). In the process of step S258, the motor 127 is driven with the drive pattern indicated by the motor drive switching control data included in the small hit control pattern so that the rotating body 79 that has been rotated in the forward direction is rotated in the reverse direction. Alternatively, for example, control data indicating an excitation pattern opposite to the excitation pattern before the switching setting is set in a predetermined output port so that the rotating body 79 that has been rotated in the reverse direction is rotated in the forward direction. Thus, a drive control signal is generated. If the game control process timer value does not match the motor drive switching determination value in step S257 (step S257; No), the process of step S258 is skipped.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the storage release determination value (step S259). The storage cancellation determination value used at this time may be shown in the small hit control pattern, or may be set by the process of step S251 or the process of step S507 described later. You may make it designate with the small hits control pattern which storage cancellation | release determination value is used. Regardless of which storage cancellation determination value is used, the storage cancellation determination value is a game control process that is larger than the big prize opening opening determination value for first opening the opening 82 in step S242. It only needs to indicate the timer value. And if it corresponds with the storage cancellation | release determination value (step S259; Yes), the drive of the storage solenoid 118 will be stopped, and the storage board 118b will be moved (retracted | removed) in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to cancel the storage. Settings for setting the state are performed (step S260). In the process of step S260, the drive of the storage solenoid 118 is stopped by reading out the storage release control data included in the small hit control pattern and stopping the output of the drive control signal according to the read data. If the game control process timer value does not match the storage release determination value in step S259 (step S259; No), the process of step S260 is skipped.

  Thereafter, by comparing the game control process timer value with the small hit game end reference value, it is determined whether or not the timer value has reached the small hit game end reference value (step S261 in FIG. 28). At this time, if the game control process timer value does not reach the small hit game end reference value (step S261; No), the small hit release process is terminated. On the other hand, when the game control process timer value has reached the small hit game end reference value in step S261 (step S261; Yes), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball count value is “0”. Determination is made (step S262). Note that the remaining ball count value is updated by executing the processing of steps S503 and S513 (FIG. 29) described later in the processing at the time of entering the first big winning opening in step S252 shown in FIG.

  When the remaining ball count value is “0” in step S262 (step S262; Yes), a game is given to the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91 by executing a specific winning determination process. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered (step S263). Subsequently, for example, by stopping the output of the drive control signal, the setting of moving the sorting member 83 to the near side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by stopping the driving of the sorting solenoid 108. (Step S264). In this way, when the remaining ball count value is “0” in step S262, by executing the process of step S264, it is determined that there is no game ball inside the first special variable winning ball device 66. Correspondingly, the sorting operation of the sorting member 83 can be stopped. Even when the sorting member 83 is moving to the back side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by driving the sorting solenoid 108, the driving of the sorting solenoid 108 is stopped by the process of step S262. It can be stopped after returning to the near side as the initial position within a very short time (for example, less than 0.5 seconds). Further, the amount of rotation of the rotating body 79 based on the driving operation of the motor 127 is specified (step S265). For example, during the period in which the rotating body 79 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by the motor 127, the number of pulses in the output signal from the rotary encoder attached to the rotating shaft of the rotating body 79 is counted. In the process of step S265, the amount of movement in the forward direction and the reverse direction is obtained from the number of pulses, and the amount of rotation of the rotating body 79 may be specified from the difference between the amounts of movement. Alternatively, when the motor 127 has a predetermined constant rotation speed, a period during which the motor 127 rotates the rotating body 79 in the forward direction or the reverse direction is measured. In the process of step S265, the amount of movement in the forward direction and the reverse direction is obtained by multiplying each rotation period and the rotation speed, and the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 may be specified from the difference between the movement amounts. Alternatively, in the process of step S265, the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 may be specified from the resistance value of the variable resistor attached to the rotating shaft of the rotating body 79.

  Subsequently, in accordance with the rotation amount specified in step S265, the timer initial value in the motor return control timer, the motor rotation direction pattern for returning the rotating body 79 to the initial position by driving the motor 127, and the like are set. This is performed (step S266). As a specific example, it is assumed that the center of the variable advance entrance 79a is rotated 60 degrees in the forward direction from the reference line L1 shown in FIG. 4 as the rotation amount specified in the process of step S265. In this case, in the process of step S266, the motor return control timer value corresponding to the time required to rotate the rotating body 79 by 60 degrees in the reverse direction by driving the motor 127, and the motor 127 for rotationally driving the motor 127 in the reverse direction. Set the motor rotation direction pattern. Thus, in the process of step S266, by setting the motor rotation direction pattern corresponding to the rotation amount of the rotator 79, when the rotator 79 is returned to the initial position, the forward rotation indicated by the arrow A21 in FIG. 4 is performed. Of the direction (forward direction) and the direction of reverse rotation indicated by arrow A22 (reverse direction), the rotating body 79 can be rotated in a direction that can be quickly returned to the initial position and returned to the initial position. Thereafter, the game control process timer is reset to clear the timer value (step S267), the first big prize opening counter is initialized to clear the first big prize opening count value (step S268), and the small hit The process at the time of opening ends.

  If the remaining ball count value is not “0” in step S262 (step S262; No), it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value has reached the game stop determination value (step S269). At this time, if the game stop determination value is not reached (step S269; No), the small hit release process is terminated. On the other hand, when the game stop determination value is reached in step S269 (step S269; Yes), the abnormality notification process for notifying that the state is abnormal is repeatedly executed (step S270). As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped, and an illegal act performed by generating an abnormal state can be prevented. In the abnormality notification process of step S270, all the upper decoration units 22 are turned on, a predetermined notification image is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, and a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speakers 12a and 12b. Alternatively, a combination of these may be used to notify the abnormality.

  The abnormality notification process executed in step S270 may be repeatedly performed when the supply of power from the power supply board 97 is stopped, that is, until the power is turned off. In this case, when the power is cut off, the pressing operation of the clear switch 97a is performed when the power is turned on again, so that the initialization process is executed after the RAM 111 is cleared, and the abnormal state is cleared (released). That's fine. On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the notification of abnormality may be terminated even if the clear switch 97a is not pressed when the power is turned on again. Thereby, since it is not necessary to input a special signal to the main board 120 in order to clear (cancel) the abnormal state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an illegal signal is input.

  In addition, the abnormality notification process executed in step S270 is repeatedly performed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, and can automatically recover from the abnormal state after the predetermined time elapses. It may be. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify an amusement hall clerk or the like that an abnormal state has occurred, while the abnormal state does not occur even if the RAM 111 is not cleared by pressing the clear switch 97a or turning on the power again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage given to the player when it is determined as an abnormal state due to noise or the like. Alternatively, in the abnormality notification process in step S270, for example, after an effect control command that becomes an error command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 to notify the occurrence of an error, the small hit release process is performed without entering the loop process. May be terminated.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first big winning opening entry process executed in step S252 of FIG. In the first grand prize opening entry process shown in FIG. 29, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is in an on state (step S501). At this time, if the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is in the ON state (step S501; Yes), the first big prize opening count value is incremented by 1 (step S502) and the remaining ball count value is incremented by 1. (Step S503). Further, the game stop determination value is set (updated) (step S504). If the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is in the OFF state in step S501 (step S501; No), the processes in steps S502 to S504 are skipped.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the approaching ball detector 109 is in an on state (step S505). At this time, if the detection signal from the approaching ball detector 109 is in the ON state (step S505; Yes), an effect control command for instructing the start of the effect operation for notifying that the game ball has been guided to the second area 88. Is set to transmit the second effect start command to the effect control board 90 (step S506). For example, in the process of step S506, the CPU 112 sets the start address of the table data constituting the second effect start command table stored in the ROM 100 as the transmission command pointer. When the setting in step S506 is performed in this way, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. A second effect start command is transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90. When the process of step S506 is executed, the storage cancellation determination value is set (updated) (step S507). For example, in the process of step S507, based on the game control process timer value, the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected by the entering ball detector 109 and then provided in the second area 88. The timer determination value corresponding to a sufficient time until the vehicle enters the second specific entrance 91 and is detected by the second specific sphere detector 121b is set. Thus, the storage solenoid 118 is driven to maintain the storage state until the timing at which it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball detected by the entry ball detector 109 has entered the second specific entrance 91, so that the player can maintain the storage state. By controlling the storage plate 118b to the storage open state after the timing when the game ball enters the second specific entrance 91 provided in the advantageous second region 88, the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance are controlled. It is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the mouth 91 at the same time, and to detect the game balls that have entered the second specific entrance 91 more preferentially than the detection of the game balls that have entered the first specific entrance 89. When a plurality of game balls enter the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91, which are specific areas, the round control pattern is determined corresponding to the first game ball entered. , The round control pattern game balls Advantageously second specific entry opening 91 for the player than the first specific inlets 89 corresponding to the entered can be determined preferentially. If the detection signal from the approaching ball detector 109 is off in step S505 (step S505; No), the processing in steps S506 and S507 is skipped.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first specific sphere detector 121a is in an on state (step S508). At this time, if the detection signal from the first specific sphere detector 121a is on (step S508; Yes), the first specific sphere detection flag is set to the on state (step S509). If the detection signal from the first specific sphere detector 121a is in the OFF state in step S508 (step S508; No), the process of step S509 is skipped. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second specific sphere detector 121b is on (step S510). At this time, if the detection signal from the second specific sphere detector 121b is on (step S510; Yes), the second specific sphere detection flag is set to the on state (step S511). If the detection signal from the second specific sphere detector 121b is in the off state in step S510 (step S510; No), the process of step S511 is skipped.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the discharge ball detector 122 is in an on state (step S512). At this time, if the detection signal from the discharge ball detector 122 is in an OFF state (step S512; No), the process at the time of entering the first big prize opening is ended. On the other hand, if the detection signal from the discharge ball detector 122 is in the on state (step S512; Yes), the remaining ball number count value is decremented by 1 (step S513), and then the first big winning opening is entered. The process ends.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific winning determination process executed in step S263 of FIG. In the specific winning determination process shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 112 first enters the first specific entrance 89 by the first specific sphere detector 121a by determining whether or not the first specific sphere detection flag is on. It is determined whether or not the played game ball is detected (step S521). At this time, if the first specific sphere detection flag is on (step S521; Yes), after clearing the first specific sphere detection flag to turn it off (step S522), the random number MR3 for determining the number of rounds is set. The numerical data shown is extracted (step S523). In the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 25, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 may be extracted together with the random value MR1. In this case, the random value MR3 extracted in the process of step S202 is set in a predetermined buffer, and in step S523, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 may be read from the buffer. After executing the processing of step S523, the round that becomes the maximum number of continuations of the round game in the big hit gaming state by referring to the round number determination table 230 as shown in FIG. 12 based on the extracted random value MR3 The maximum value is determined (step S524). Subsequent to the processing in step S524, a round control pattern corresponding to the maximum round value is set (step S525). In the process of step S525, the round control patterns RP3-1 to RP3 correspond to whether the round maximum value determined in the process of step S524 is “1”, “3”, or “5”. -3 is set. That is, the round control pattern RP3-1 for one round is set in response to the maximum round value being determined as “1”, and three rounds in response to the maximum round value being determined as “3”. The round control pattern RP3-2 is set, and the round control pattern RP3-3 for 5 rounds is set in response to the maximum round value being determined as “5”.

  If the first specific sphere detection flag is off in step S521 (step S521; No), the second specific sphere detection is performed by determining whether or not the second specific sphere detection flag is on. It is determined whether or not a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 91 is detected by the device 121b (step S526). At this time, if the second specific sphere detection flag is on (step S526; Yes), after the second specific sphere detection flag is cleared and turned off (step S527), the round control pattern RP2-for 15 rounds is set. 1 is set (step S528).

  After performing one of the processes of steps S525 and S528, setting for transmitting a big hit start command to the effect control board 90 is performed (step S529). For example, in the process of step S529, the CPU 112 sets the head address of the table data constituting the jackpot start command table stored in the ROM 100 in the transmission command pointer in the same manner as the process of step S223 shown in FIG. When the setting in step S529 is performed in this way, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. A big hit start command is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Subsequent to the process of step S529, the big hit game start waiting time is set in the same manner as the process of step S224 shown in FIG. 26, for example (step S530). Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-hit opening process (step S531), and the specific winning determination process is terminated.

  If the second specific ball detection flag is off in step S526 (step S526; No), a small hit end effect command, which is an effect control command for instructing a notification operation that the small hit gaming state has ended, Settings for transmission to the effect control board 90 are made (step S532). Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S533), and the specific winning determination process is terminated.

  Thus, the specific winning determination process is executed in response to the determination that the remaining ball count value is “0” in the process of step S262 shown in FIG. In the specific winning determination process, for example, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” by executing the process of step S531, while the special figure process flag is obtained by executing the process of step S533. Is updated to “0”. In this way, by updating the value of the special figure process flag in the specific winning determination process, corresponding to the determination that there is no gaming ball inside the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66, step S52 shown in FIG. The process of S56 can be executed, and it is possible to start the determination (execution of the first error determination process) as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 has been improperly detected. .

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In this jackpot end process, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not a predetermined jackpot end waiting time has elapsed (step S311). At this time, if the big hit end waiting time has not elapsed (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  When the big hit end waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the advantageous state flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is set to the on state (step S312), and the advantageous state termination condition Is set (step S313). As an example, in the process of step S313, the CPU 112 sets a special time chart fluctuation number (for example, “10”) that is predetermined as the number of times of the usual game that can be executed in the special game state, as a game control counter setting unit 164. Is set in the variable display number counter provided in. In this case, for example, the advantageous state end determination value is set to “0”. Each time the normal symbol stop process of step S143 shown in FIG. 32 described later is executed, for example, the value of the variable display number counter is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the updated value is used as the advantageous state end determination value. When “0” is reached, the special gaming state may be terminated and control to shift to the normal gaming state may be performed. Alternatively, in the process of step S313, by clearing the variable display number counter, “0” is set as the initial count value, and an advantageous state end determination value (for example, “10”) corresponding to the special time fluctuation number is set. You may make it set. In this case, every time the normal symbol stop process of step S143 shown in FIG. 32 described later is executed, for example, the value of the variable display number counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1, and the updated value is determined as the advantageous state end determination. When the value is reached, it is only necessary to control to end the special gaming state and shift to the normal gaming state.

  After the advantageous condition end condition is set in step S313, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S314), and then the big hit end process is ended.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S17 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 112 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 58a provided in the passage gate 58 is in an on state, thereby determining whether the game ball has passed through the passage gate 58. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 58 and the detection signal from the gate switch 58a is turned on (step S131; Yes), processing at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 58a is in the off state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  In the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, first, the number of reserved maps stored, which is the number of reserved data stored in the reserved map storage unit 161, is set to a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). It is determined whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored ordinary maps is less than the upper limit value, numerical data indicating a random number value MR2 for determining a displayed map result is extracted. For example, the CPU 112 extracts numerical data generated by a random counter incorporated in the game control microcomputer 99 separately from the random number generation circuit 60a as numerical data indicating the random value MR2. Then, numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR2 is set at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reservation storage unit 161. At this time, for example, it may be updated so that 1 is added to the common figure reserved memory number count value which is the count value in the common figure reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 164. In addition, a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to be a general-purpose reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 90 is performed, and a normal symbol start memory display area provided in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. Then, an effect image that can specify the number of reserved customary drawings may be displayed.

  After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 58a is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. If the value is other than “0”, the normal symbol normal processing is terminated as it is. As a result, during the period from when the special symbol change is started until the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed, or during the period where the small hit game state or the big hit game state is controlled, the normal symbol change in the normal game is not changed. It is possible not to start, and it is possible to control so that various effects due to display of effect images in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b do not compete. In particular, if the change of the normal symbol in the normal game is not started in the big hit game state, the normal symbol change state (for example, the number of times the normal figure game is executed in the big hit game state, or just before the big hit game state ends) The advantage of the game content in the special game state, such as whether or not the execution of a special game is started, etc. Can be prevented from appearing. If the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” when the normal symbol normal processing is executed, the normal symbol display device 63 determines whether or not there is reserved data stored in the general symbol hold storage unit 161. It is determined whether or not to start the usual game. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the ordinary figure storage unit 161, the value of the ordinary figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the normal diagram display result, the normal symbol display result as the variable display result in the normal game is expressed as “per 1st normal diagram” or “second For example, a determination of “per common map” or a determination of “normal map loss” is performed. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. In the normal symbol determination process, the normal symbol display device 63 is set to transmit a normal symbol variation start command to the effect control board 90 as an effect control command corresponding to the start of the variation of the normal symbol. Is done. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, in response to the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 63, the universal symbol display result is “per 1st normal symbol”, for example, by a display operation by the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. Alternatively, a process of determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect operation that is a notice effect for notifying that “per second map” will be executed may be executed. Alternatively, a process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and a process for determining the kind of the notice effect when it is determined to execute the notice effect from a plurality of predetermined types may be executed. . The determination result and the determination result regarding such a notice effect may be notified to the effect control board 90 by the ordinary figure change start command, or to the effect control board 90 by an effect control command different from the ordinary figure change start command. May be notified. Alternatively, a different normal pattern variation pattern may be determined according to a determination result or a determination result regarding the notice effect.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time since the normal symbol started to change is measured, and it is determined whether or not the elapsed time has reached the normal symbol variation time determined in accordance with the regular symbol variation pattern. Is done. When the normal symbol change time is reached, the normal symbol display device 63 transmits an ordinary symbol change end command to the effect control board 90 as an effect control command corresponding to the end of the change of the normal symbol. You may make it perform the setting of. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 90, the effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) executed in response to the variable symbol variable display is ended based on the reception of the universal symbol variation end command. It only has to be set. Alternatively, the transmission of the usual figure change end command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 may not be performed. In this case, on the side of the production control board 90, the normal figure change time corresponding to the normal figure change pattern indicated in the normal figure change start command is specified, and the elapsed time after receiving the normal figure change start command When the specified normal figure variation time is reached, a setting for ending the effect executed in response to the variable display of the normal symbol is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 120. What should I do? After such various settings are made, the value of the general process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per 1st universal symbol” or “per 2nd universal symbol”, the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory provided in the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 is operated. The setting for driving is performed, and the value of the normal process flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, when the normal map display result is “normal map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”. Also, in the normal symbol stop process, setting for ending the special game state and shifting to the normal game state is performed based on the number of times of execution of the normal game in the special game state.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this normal electric actor actuating process, the game ball can be guided to the starting area 56 formed in the normal variable winning ball device 61 in response to the variable display result in the normal game being “per normal game”. Control is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 59 provided in the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 is set in accordance with the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process in step S143. A drive control signal for driving may be generated. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time since the game ball can be guided to the starting area 56 by driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 59 and advancing the variable guiding member 61a is measured. It is determined whether or not the time has reached the guidance end time corresponding to the advance end determination value. Further, in the normal electric accessory actuating process, it is also determined whether or not a game ball that has entered the start area 56 is detected by the start port switch 60. When the elapsed time reaches the guidance end time or when the game ball is detected by the start port switch 60, the driving of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 59 is stopped and the game ball enters the start area 56. Set to disable. Here, when the elapsed time reaches the guidance end time, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “0” in response to the elapse of a predetermined effective guidance time. The effective guidance time is the period from the time when the elapsed time reaches the guidance end time, the driving of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped and the variable guidance member 61a is retracted. Any time may be sufficient if a sufficient period is added until it is detected by the switch 60. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 60, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0” at that time, or it corresponds to the fact that a predetermined guidance end waiting time has elapsed. Then, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol determination process executed in step S141 of FIG. In this normal symbol determination process, the CPU 112 first shows a numerical value indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the normal graphic display result as the reserved data stored in the universal symbol storage unit 161 corresponding to the reserved number “1”. Data is read out (step S351). At this time, for example, the general-purpose reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1 and updated, so that the general-purpose reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the general-purpose reserved memory unit 161 holds the reservation number “1”. The hold data indicating the random number value MR2 stored in the lower entry (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) is shifted upward by one entry (step S352).

  Following the process of step S352, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state flag is on (step S353). At this time, if the advantageous state flag is off (step S353; No), a table for making a determination on the normal figure display result as the variable display result in the normal figure game is shown as a table for normal time shown in FIG. The figure display result determination table 210A is set (step S354). On the other hand, if the advantageous state flag is on (step S353; Yes), an advantageous table shown in FIG. 9B is shown as a table for making a determination on the usual figure display result as the variable display result in the ordinary figure game. The time map display result determination table 210B is set (step S355).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S354 and S355, the general map display result is set to “per 1st normal map” or “2nd general map” by referring to the general map display result determination table set in each process. It is determined whether it is “winning” or “ordinary loss” (step S356). At this time, if it is determined that the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd general map”, the normal symbol indicating “○” as the determined normal symbol in the general game is displayed. The design may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the normal map display result is “normal map loss”, a normal symbol indicating “×” may be determined as the determined normal symbol in the normal game.

  After determining the usual figure display result in step S356, the value of the usual figure display result flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 is set (step S357). For example, in the process of step S357, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), in response to the determination that the map display result is “per 1st map” in the process of step S356, The value of the normal map display result flag is set to “1”. If it is determined in the process of step S356 that the normal map display result is “per second general map”, the value of the general map display result flag is set to “2”. If it is determined in the process of step S356 that the normal map display result is “normal map loss”, the value of the general map display result flag is set to “3”.

  After setting the value of the normal map display result flag in step S357, the general map change pattern corresponding to the normal map display result is determined by referring to the general map change pattern determination table 221 shown in FIG. S358). Subsequently, the base map change time corresponding to the base map change pattern determined in step S358 is set (step S359). As an example, in the process of step S359, the CPU 112 specifies and specifies the normal time change time corresponding to the normal time change pattern by referring to the normal time change pattern determination table 221 as shown in FIG. A timer initial value corresponding to the usual figure change time is set in a usual figure change timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 162. In this case, every time the normal symbol variation process of step S142 shown in FIG. 32 is executed, for example, the value of the usual variation timer is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the value becomes “0”. Then, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation has reached the normal symbol variation time. Alternatively, in the process of step S359, by clearing the common map variation timer, “0” may be set as the timer initial value, and a general diagram variation end determination value corresponding to the general diagram variation time may be set. . In this case, each time the normal symbol variation process of step S142 shown in FIG. 32 is executed, for example, the value of the common symbol variation timer is updated to be incremented by 1, and the value reaches the universal variation variation determination value. In this case, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of normal symbol variation has reached the normal symbol variation time.

  After setting the normal map change time in step S359, a setting for transmitting a normal map change start command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 is made (step S360). Here, the universal map change start command is the universal map display result determined in the process of step S356, the universal map change pattern determined in the process of step S358, and the universal map set in the process of step S359. An effect control command indicating a change time or the like may be used. For example, in the process of step S360, the CPU 112 sets the head address of the table data constituting the common map change start command table stored in the ROM 100 to a transmission command pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 111 or the like. When the setting in step S360 is performed in this way, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. 21 is executed after the normal symbol determination process is completed, so that the main board 120 applies to the effect control board 90. Thus, a command change start command is transmitted. In addition to the normal map change start command, an effect control command indicating the normal map display result may be transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90. However, since the base map display result is indicated by the base map change start command, there is no need to separately transmit the effect control command indicating the base map display result, so the main board 120 transmits to the effect control board 90. It is possible to reduce the number of effect control commands to be performed, and to reduce the control burden on the main board 120 and the capacity of stored data.

  After setting the transmission of the common figure change start command in step S360, the value of the common figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the normal symbol change process (step S361), and then the normal symbol is changed. The determination process ends.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop process executed in step S143 of FIG. In this normal symbol stop process, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol display result flag is “1” corresponding to “per 1st normal symbol” (step S371). At this time, if the value of the general map display result flag is “1” (step S371; Yes), a general electric operation pattern corresponding to the fact that the general map display result is “per 1st general map” is set ( Step S372). For example, in the process of step S372, the CPU 112 determines whether or not an advantageous state flag is on. When the advantageous state flag is OFF, the general electric operation pattern corresponding to the determination that the base map display result is “per first base map” when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state. Set FA1-1. On the other hand, when the advantageous state flag is ON, the general map display result corresponding to the determination that the base map display result is “per 1st base map” when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special gaming state. Electric operation pattern FA2-1 is set.

  If the value of the normal map display result flag is not “1” in step S371 (step S371; No), it is determined whether or not the value is “2” corresponding to “per second map”. (Step S373). At this time, if the value of the general map display result flag is “2” (step S373; Yes), a general electric operation pattern corresponding to the fact that the general map display result is “per second map” is set ( Step S374). For example, in the process of step S374, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the advantageous state flag is on. When the advantageous state flag is OFF, the general electric operation pattern corresponding to the determination that the base map display result is “per second base map” when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state. Set FA1-2. On the other hand, when the advantageous state flag is on, the universal map display result corresponding to the determination that the base map display result is “per second base map” when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special gaming state. Electric operation pattern FA2-2 is set.

  In this way, in the processing of steps S372 and S374, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state, and whether the usual diagram display result is “per first diagram” or “first” Depending on whether it is “per 2 map”, a different normal operation pattern can be set. As a result, the operation state of the variable guide member 61a that allows the game ball to enter the start area 56 by driving the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory in the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 is the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be made different depending on whether the game is in the normal game state or the special game state, and whether the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd normal map”.

  For example, in response to the ordinary electric operation pattern set in the processes of steps S372 and S374, the variable induction member 61a is advanced by driving the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61. A winning time during which a game ball can enter the start area 56 is set. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, when the normal power operation pattern FA1-1 is set in the process of step S372, or the general power operation pattern FA2-1 or the general power operation pattern FA2-2 is set in the process of step S374. If set, the winning time is set to “5 seconds”. On the other hand, when the normal operation pattern FA1-2 is set in the process of step S372, the winning time is set to “0.1 second”. As a result, when the base game display result is “per 1st base game”, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus At 61, the game ball can enter the starting area 56 for 5 seconds. On the other hand, when the game display result is “per second game”, the game ball can enter the start area 56 for 0.1 second when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal game state. On the other hand, when in the special game state, the game ball can enter the start area 56 for 5 seconds.

  In other words, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the game ball can enter the start area 56 for 5 seconds in response to the normal diagram display result being “per first diagram”. On the other hand, the game ball can enter the start area 56 for 0.1 second in response to the base map display result being “per second base map”. On the other hand, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special game state, regardless of whether the normal map display result is “per 1st general map” or “per 2nd general map”, In response to the variable display result of “per normal map”, the game ball can enter the start area 56 for 5 seconds. And, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal game state, if the base map display result is “per 1st base map”, the base map display result is “per 2nd base map”. Since the game ball can enter the starting area 56 for 5 seconds longer than 0.1 seconds corresponding to the situation, the player is more likely to see the “normal map display result” per “second map”. An advantageous first guiding action will be performed. On the other hand, when the general map display result is “per second general map”, it is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the first guidance operation performed when the general map display result is “per first general map”. The second guiding operation is performed.

  After performing one of the processes of steps S372 and S374, a setting for transmitting a general electric operation start command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 is performed (step S375). The general electric operation start command is an effect of notifying that the game ball can enter the start area 56 by driving the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 61 and the variable guiding member 61a moving forward. Control command. For example, in the process of step S375, the CPU 112 sets the head address of the table data constituting the ordinary power operation start command table stored in the ROM 100 to a transmission command pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 111 or the like. When the setting in step S375 is performed in this way, the display command control process in step S18 shown in FIG. 21 is executed after the normal symbol stop process is completed, so that the main board 120 applies to the effect control board 90. Will be sent a command to start operation.

  After executing the process of step S375, the value of the ordinary process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S376). Further, when the value of the normal diagram display result flag is not “2” in step S373 (step S373; No), the value of the general diagram process flag is updated to “0” (step S377).

  Subsequently, the CPU 112 determines whether or not the advantageous state flag is on (step S378). At this time, if the advantageous state flag is off (step S378; No), the normal symbol stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if the advantageous state flag is on (step S378; Yes), the variable display count value which is the value of the variable display count counter is updated by subtracting 1 or adding 1 (step S378). S379). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display count value after the update in the process of step S379 matches the advantageous state end determination value (step S380).

  If the variable display count value matches the advantageous state end determination value in step S380 (step S380; Yes), the advantageous state flag is cleared and turned off (step S381), and then the normal symbol stop process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the variable display count value does not match the advantageous state end determination value in step S380 (step S380; No), the normal symbol stop process is terminated without executing the process of step S381.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S24 illustrated in FIG. 21 as the motor initial position return control process. When the motor initial position return control process shown in FIG. 35 is started, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not the motor return control timer value is “0” (step S151). At this time, if the motor return control timer value is “0” (step S151; Yes), it is determined that control for returning the rotating body 79 to the initial position by driving the motor 127 is unnecessary, The motor initial position return control process is terminated.

  If the motor return control timer value is other than “0” in step S151 (step S151; No), the motor return control timer value is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 (step S152). Then, it is determined whether or not the motor return control timer value after the update by the process of step S152 has become “0” (step S153). At this time, if the motor return control timer value is other than “0” (step S153; No), the rotating body 79 is driven by driving the motor 127 according to the motor rotation direction pattern set in the process of step S266 shown in FIG. The operation for rotating is set (step S154). For example, in the process of step S154, the motor 127 is driven according to the motor rotation direction pattern, and the rotating body 79 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (forward direction) indicated by arrow A21 in FIG. A drive control signal is generated so as to rotate in the reverse direction.

  When the motor return control timer value is “0” in step S153 (step S153; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the drive control signal to the motor 127, the rotating body 79 is driven by driving the motor 127. Stop setting for the rotating operation is performed (step S155). Thus, even after the small hit gaming state ends, the motor 127 is driven according to the motor rotation direction pattern until the motor return control timer value becomes “0”, thereby rotating the rotating body 79 until it returns to the initial position. Can do. Then, after the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position, the rotation operation is stopped, so that the power consumption can be reduced compared to the case where the rotating body 79 is always rotated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 90 will be described. In the effect control board 90, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 97 or the like, the effect control microcomputer 170 is activated, and the CPU 181 executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 36 is started, the CPU 181 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 183, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Performs register setting for CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, random number update processing is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating various random number values used for effect control is updated. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer 170 generates an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 120, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 120 is turned on. When an interrupt due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the CPU 181 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state, the interrupt prohibition instruction ( It is desirable to issue a DI command. The CPU 181 executes a predetermined command reception interrupt process, for example, in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a predetermined signal for receiving a control signal transmitted from the main board 120 via the peripheral command relay board 57 among the input ports included in the input / output port 185 provided in the effect control microcomputer 170 is provided. A control signal as an effect control command is taken in from the input port. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 183. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the CPU 181 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99 of the main board 120 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process process is executed (step S406). In this effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, an audio output operation from the speakers 12a and 12b, and various game effect LEDs / lamps 13, 14a to 14d, 16a, 16b and 17a. , 17b and the lighting operations of the various decorative LEDs / lamps 32 are set and controlled in accordance with an effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 120. After performing the effect control process in step S406, the sound / lamp control command process is performed (step S407), and the process returns to step S402. In the sound / lamp control command processing executed in step S407, the audio output control data for controlling the audio output operation by the speakers 12a and 12b based on the settings and control contents in the effect control process in step S406, or various types Control command that becomes control data for controlling various effect operations, such as lighting control data for controlling lighting operations of the game effect LED / lamps 13, 14a to 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b and various decoration LEDs / lamps 32 Settings are made.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the CPU 181 executes the following steps S160 to S170 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 183, for example.

  The process of waiting for reception of the normal variation start command in step S160 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this normal figure change start command reception waiting process, whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b based on whether or not the normal figure change start command from the main board 120 has been received. The process which determines is included.

  The decorative symbol variable display setting process in step S161 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This decorative symbol variable display setting process is performed in order to perform various effects including variable display of decorative symbols in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b in response to the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol in the general game. This includes processing for selecting an effect control pattern according to the variation pattern and the like. Further, in the decorative symbol variable display setting process, a process of determining whether or not to perform a predetermined performance action that is a notice effect based on a normal pattern variation pattern or the like may be executed. Alternatively, a process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and a process for determining the kind of the notice effect when it is determined to execute the notice effect from a plurality of predetermined types may be executed. . Alternatively, in the case where the determination as to whether or not to execute the notice effect is made by the CPU 112 of the game control microcomputer 99 or the like on the main board 120 side, this corresponds to the determination that the notice effect is executed. Thus, a process for determining the type of the notice effect may be executed. Alternatively, when the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect and the determination of the type of the notice effect are performed by the CPU 112 of the game control microcomputer 99 on the main board 120 side, the notice effect is executed. A process for setting an effect control pattern or the like may be executed corresponding to the type of the notice effect determined based on the determination of the effect.

  The decorative symbol variable display process in step S162 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this decorative symbol variable display process, the CPU 181 corresponds to the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 183, for example, from the effect control pattern to the display control data, voice control data, lamp control data. Are read out. In accordance with the effect control data read at this time, for example, determination of a display control command to be transmitted to the display control unit 171, generation of audio output control data or lighting control data to be transmitted to the audio frame lamp board 92, etc. Various settings and controls are performed during variable display of decorative symbols. Then, a predetermined display control command is issued in response to the reception of the normal diagram change end command from the main board 120 or the determination that the normal control change time has elapsed on the side of the effect control board 90. By transmitting to the display control unit 171, a confirmed decorative pattern that is a variable display result of the decorative pattern is displayed.

  As an example, when a predetermined end code is read out from the effect control pattern, it is confirmed at each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol variable display portions in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. A temporary stop display is made to change the state of the swinging fluctuation in a state where the decorative design that is the decorative design is not fixed, and the display of the fixed decorative design is confirmed in response to receiving the command to end the change of the general drawing from the main board 120. May be. As another example, when the end code is read from the effect control pattern, the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b can be used without receiving an effect control command such as a normal map change end command from the main board 120. The display of the confirmed decorative pattern may be confirmed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern variable display sections. In this case, when the normal map change time corresponding to the normal map change pattern indicated in the normal map change start command has elapsed, the effect control board 90 does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 120. It is possible to autonomously derive and display a definite decorative symbol on the side of.

  The ordinary power operation start waiting process in step S163 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this normal power operation start waiting process, the CPU 181 determines whether or not a general power operation start command transmitted from the main board 120 has been received. When the command for starting the electric power operation is received, the display result of the normal map is “per 1st normal map” or “per 2nd normal map”, that is, the variable display result of the decorative pattern is the first hit combination. Fixed decorative symbols (for example, decorative symbols indicating the same alphanumeric character “7” in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative variable display portions) and a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ Based on the fact that the decorative design variable display of “left”, “middle”, and “right” has become alphanumeric characters “1”, “2”, “3”, etc., respectively, the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory Is updated, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during normal power operation. On the other hand, if the predetermined normal power operation start waiting time has elapsed without receiving the normal power operation start command, it is determined that the normal map display result is “normal map loss” and the effect process flag is set. The value is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The effect processing during normal power operation in step S164 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this ordinary power operation effect processing, the CPU 181 reads out various effect control data from, for example, the ordinary power operation effect control pattern stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. 20, and converts the effect control data into the read effect control data. Set and control accordingly. As a result, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 can execute an effect operation corresponding to the fact that the game ball can enter the start area 56. Further, in the ordinary power operation effect processing, it is determined whether or not a special figure change start command transmitted from the main board 120 has been received. When the special figure change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the special figure change effect setting process. On the other hand, when a predetermined special figure fluctuation start waiting time has elapsed without receiving the special figure fluctuation start command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  The special figure variation effect setting process in step S165 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In order to perform various effect operations including the display of effect images in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b in response to the start of the change of special symbols in the special symbol game, This includes processing for selecting an effect control pattern according to the variation pattern and the like.

  The special-fluctuation effect process in step S166 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the special figure variation effect process, the CPU 181 corresponds to the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 183, for example, from the effect control pattern to the display control data, voice control data, and lamp control data. Are read out. In accordance with the effect control data read at this time, for example, determination of a display control command to be transmitted to the display control unit 171, generation of audio output control data or lighting control data to be transmitted to the audio frame lamp board 92, etc. Various settings and controls are performed during variable display of decorative symbols. A predetermined display control command is issued in response to the reception of the special figure change end command from the main board 120 or the determination that the special figure change time has elapsed on the side of the effect control board 90. The presentation operation corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is terminated by transmitting to the display control unit 171 or transmitting audio output control data or lighting control data to the audio frame lamp substrate 92.

  The special figure waiting process in step S167 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the special figure waiting process, the CPU 181 determines whether or not a big hit start command or a small hit start command transmitted from the main board 120 has been received. Then, when the big hit start command is received, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit”, and after performing a predetermined setting such as setting a big hit gaming state production control pattern, the production process flag Is updated to “9”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit effect processing. On the other hand, when the small hit start command is received, it is determined that the special figure display result is any one of “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, for example, an effect for the small hit gaming state After performing a predetermined setting such as setting a control pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hitting effect process.

  The effect processing during small hits in step S168 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “8”. In this small hit effect processing, for example, the CPU 181 displays a predetermined effect image corresponding to the small hit game state in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b by transmitting a display control command to the display control unit 171 or a voice frame. Various effects control in the small hit gaming state is performed such as voice output corresponding to the small hit gaming state and lighting operation of the lamp or the like by transmission of voice output control data and lighting control data to the lamp substrate 92. For example, during the waiting period from when the special symbol change is stopped and the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 44a until the opening 82 is opened by the starting operation, the special symbol is displayed. An effect image for notifying that the variation display result is any one of “first small hit” to “fourth small hit” is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, or the special figure display result Corresponds to the opening state of the opening 82 based on the fact that is changed from “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, “Aim at the honey !!” (FIG. 47B described later) For example, it is only necessary to perform effect control such as displaying an effect image indicating a notification message such as, for example, in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. When the big hit start command transmitted from the main board 120 is received, it is determined that a big hit has occurred due to the game ball entering the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 as the specific area. For example, after performing a predetermined setting such as setting an effect control pattern for the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “9” which is a value corresponding to the big hit effect process. On the other hand, when the small hit end command transmitted from the main board 120 is received, it is determined that the small hit gaming state has ended without the game ball entering the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91. Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect processing in step S169 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “9”. In this jackpot effect processing, the CPU 181 displays a predetermined effect image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state on the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b by transmitting a display control command to the display control unit 171, for example, or a voice frame lamp board. Various presentation control in the big hit gaming state is performed such as voice output corresponding to the big hit gaming state and lighting operation of a lamp or the like by transmission of the voice output control data and lighting control data to 92. Then, for example, in response to receiving the jackpot end command transmitted from the main board 120, the rendering operation in the jackpot gaming state is terminated, and the value of the rendering process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process “10”. Update to "".

  The ending effect process in step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “10”. In this ending effect process, for example, a display control command is transmitted to the display control unit 171 so that a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, or audio output control is performed on the audio frame lamp substrate 92. Transmitting data and lighting control data to output sound from the speakers 12a and 12b, and lighting various game effect LED / lamps 13, 14a to 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b or various decoration LEDs / lamps 32 Thus, a process for controlling the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is included.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variable display setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variable display setting process, the CPU 181 first determines whether or not the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” (step S701). For example, in the process of step S701, the CPU 181 determines that the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” from the general map display result or the normal map change pattern indicated in the general map change start command transmitted from the main board 120. It may be determined whether or not.

  If the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” in step S701 (step S701; Yes), the determined decorative symbol of the first hit combination is determined (step S702). For example, in the process of step S702, the CPU 181 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a symbol to be updated updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 184 or software executed by the CPU 181 and stored in advance in the ROM 182 or the like. By referring to the per-combination symbol determination table or the like, any one of a plurality of types of determined decorative symbols as the first per-combination combination is determined as a display result in the current variable display of decorative symbols. In the first winning combination symbol determination table, random numbers for determining the winning symbol are displayed together on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol variable display portions in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. It may be configured from setting data (decision data) or the like associated with the same decorative design (for example, a decorative design indicating the same alphanumeric character “7” in “left”, “middle”, “right”).

  After the final decorative symbol of the first winning combination is determined in step S702, an effect control pattern corresponding to the base map display result being “per first base symbol” is determined (step S703). For example, in the processing of step S703, the CPU 181 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for pattern determination updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 184 or software executed by the CPU 181 and stores the first numerical value stored in advance in the ROM 182 or the like. By referring to the per-general effect control pattern determination table, etc., any of a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the fact that the normal map display result is “per first general map” Is determined as an effect control pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the CPU 181 determines whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal gaming state or a special gaming state based on, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 120, and differs depending on the determination result. An effect control pattern may be determined. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, this time from the effect control patterns such as A-1 and A-2 stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to select and determine the effect control pattern in the variable display of the decorative design. Further, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special gaming state, this time from the production control patterns such as B-1 and B-2 stored in the production control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to select and determine the effect control pattern in the variable display of the decorative design.

  If the map display result is not “per 1st map” in step S701 (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not the map display result is “per 2nd map”. (Step S704). At this time, if the normal figure display result is “per second normal figure” (step S704; Yes), a final decorative symbol of the second hit combination is determined (step S705). For example, in the process of step S705, the CPU 181 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining symbols per hit that is updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 184 or software executed by the CPU 181 and stored in advance in the ROM 182 or the like. By referring to a second per combination symbol determination table that is different from the per per symbol combination symbol determination table, etc., one of the determined decorative symbols that are different from the first per combination different second per symbol combinations is displayed for the current decoration. It is determined as a display result in variable display of symbols. The second winning combination symbol determination table displays a random number for determining the winning symbol on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol variable display sections in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. If it is composed of setting data (decision data) etc. associated with symbols (for example, decorative symbols indicating alphanumeric characters “1”, “2”, “3” in “left”, “middle”, “right”) Good. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the second per-combination may be a decorative pattern of a combination in which the same decorative pattern is not aligned in each of the decorative pattern variable display portions of “left”, “middle”, and “right” What includes reach may be included, or only one that does not reach may be included. In addition, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special gaming state, the fixed decorative symbols that become the second hit combination are the same in the decorative symbol variable display portions of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It is good also as a decorative pattern of the combination which the decorative pattern arranged. As a result, in the special gaming state, the winning time is longer than “0.1 seconds” by the setting of the general electric operation pattern FA2-2 based on the result of the normal game display result being “per 2nd general figure”. ”, It is possible to easily recognize that the game ball can be won in the start area 56, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Here, “reach” means that the same decorative design is aligned and stopped on a part of the predetermined decorative variable display portion on the predetermined effective line and is not yet stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). Display mode in which variable display is performed in the decorative symbol variable display section on the line (for example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol variable display provided in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b) The “decorative” variable display portion of the “left” and “right” of the sections has the same decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) is stopped and displayed, and the “decimal” variable symbol is variable. The display part is still in the display mode in which the variable display is still performed), or the variable display part of the decorative pattern on the effective line is displayed in a variable manner in synchronism while constituting a state in which all or some of the decorative patterns are the same. Display mode (for example, effect display device 44 A mode in which the same decorative design is provided no matter which state is displayed by performing variable display on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design variable display sections provided in the display area 80 (Display mode in which variable display is performed).

  After the final decorative symbol of the second winning combination is determined in step S705, an effect control pattern corresponding to the base map display result being “per second base symbol” is determined (step S706). For example, in the process of step S706, the CPU 181 extracts numerical data indicating random values for pattern determination updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 184 or software executed by the CPU 181 and stores the second numerical value stored in advance in the ROM 182 or the like. By referring to the per-general effect control pattern determination table, etc., one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the fact that the normal map display result is “per second general map” Is determined as an effect control pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the CPU 181 determines whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal gaming state or a special gaming state based on, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 120, and differs depending on the determination result. An effect control pattern may be determined. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, this time from the effect control patterns such as A-1 and A-2 stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to select and determine the effect control pattern in the variable display of the decorative design. Further, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special gaming state, this time from the effect control patterns such as B-1 and B-2 stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to select and determine the effect control pattern in the variable display of the decorative design.

  If the normal map display result is not “per second general map” in step S704 (step S704; No), a finalized decorative symbol for the combination of the misses is determined (step S707). For example, in the process of step S707, the CPU 181 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining a lost symbol updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 184 or software executed by the CPU 181, and the lost data stored in advance in the ROM 182 or the like. Any of the fixed decorative symbols that are different from the first winning combination or the second winning combination by referring to the combination symbol determining table or the like, or that are the same combination as the second winning combination, and become a plurality of types of lost combinations. Is determined as the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern this time.

  After determining the final decorative pattern of the lost combination in step S707, the effect control pattern corresponding to the normal map display result of “normal map lost” is determined (step S708). For example, in the process of step S708, the CPU 181 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for pattern determination updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 184 or software executed by the CPU 181 and is stored in advance in the ROM 182 or the like. By referring to the lost effect control pattern determination table, etc., one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the fact that the normal map display result is “normal map lose” It is determined as an effect control pattern in variable display. At this time, the CPU 181 determines whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal gaming state or a special gaming state based on, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 120, and differs depending on the determination result. An effect control pattern may be determined. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the decoration of the current time is determined from the presentation control patterns such as the usual figure losers A-1 and A-2 stored in the presentation control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to select and determine the effect control pattern in the variable display of a symbol. Further, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special gaming state, the decoration of the present time is determined from the effect control patterns such as the usual figure lose B-1 and B-2 stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to select and determine the effect control pattern in the variable display of a symbol.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S703, S706, and S708, effect control corresponding to the effect period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the definite decorative pattern to the end of the variable display A process timer initial value is set (step S709). For example, in the process of step S709, the CPU 181 specifies the normal map change time corresponding to the normal map change pattern indicated in the normal change start command. Then, an effect control process timer initial value is set as one of the processes for setting the variable display time of the decorative symbol corresponding to the specified normal figure change time. As an example, the CPU 181 sets a timer initial value corresponding to the specified normal map change time in the effect control process timer. Alternatively, the CPU 181 may set the effect control process timer setting value read from the effect control pattern determined in any of the processes of steps S703, S706, and S708 in the effect control process timer. In these cases, every time the decorative symbol variable display process of step S162 shown in FIG. It may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of variable display of decorative symbols has reached the variable display time. As another example, the CPU 181 sets “0” as the timer initial value by clearing the effect control process timer, and sets a variable display end determination value corresponding to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Good. In this case, every time the decorative symbol variable display processing in step S162 shown in FIG. When it reaches, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative design has reached the variable display time.

  After the effect control process timer initial value is set in step S709, for example, a display control command corresponding to the display control data included in the effect control pattern is sent from the output port included in the input / output port 185 to the display control unit 171. For example, setting for starting variable display of decorative symbols in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b is performed (step S710). Then, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variable display process (step S711), the decorative symbol variable display setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the general electric operation start wait process executed in step S163 of FIG. In this ordinary power operation start waiting process, the CPU 181 first determines whether or not a predetermined ordinary power operation start waiting time has elapsed (step S721). As an example, in the decorative symbol variable display process of step S162 shown in FIG. 37, when the decorative symbol variable display is finished, a timer initial value that is set in advance corresponding to the general electric operation start waiting time is obtained. Set to timer. In the process of step S721, the value of the effect control process timer is updated by subtracting, for example, 1 and the updated timer value is matched with a predetermined normal power failure determination value (for example, “0”, etc.). In this case, it is determined that the normal power operation start waiting time has elapsed.

  If the normal power operation start waiting time has not elapsed in step S721 (step S721; No), it is determined whether or not a general power operation start command transmitted from the main board 120 has been received (step S722). ). At this time, if a normal power operation start command is not received (step S722; No), the general power operation start waiting process is terminated.

  When a normal power operation start command is received in step S722 (step S722; Yes), the normal power operation effect control pattern stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. 20 is set (step S723). . After that, for example, by transmitting a display control command corresponding to the display control data included in the ordinary power operation effect control pattern set in step S723 from the output port included in the input / output port 185 to the display control unit 171. Then, the normal variable winning ball device 61 is set to start a normal operation effect corresponding to the fact that the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 59 is driven to allow the game ball to enter the start area 56 (step S724). ). Based on these settings, for example, an effect image indicating a notification message such as “Aim for the left!” Is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, and a game ball can enter the start area 56 from the speakers 12a and 12b. It is possible to start execution of the ordinary electric operation effect such as outputting a sound as a notification message corresponding to a certain thing. It should be noted that the ordinary electric operation effect may be varied depending on, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal gaming state or a special gaming state, a variable display result in a usual game, or the like. . In this case, an effect control command indicating a gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a variable display result in the usual game may be transmitted as a general electric operation start command. Or you may make it transmit the effect control command which shows the game state in the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display result in a usual game separately from the general electric operation start command. Further, on the side of the effect control board 90, for example, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the variable in the general game are determined from the normal pattern change pattern indicated in the general figure change start command, the execution result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc. The display result may be stored in an identifiable manner. As an example, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal game state, the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 uses the ordinary variable winning ball device 61 based on the fact that the usual figure display result is “per second figure”. When 59 is driven, the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the variable display result of the decorative pattern may be continued even if the normal power operation start command is received. On the other hand, if the map display result is “per 1st map”, or if the map display result is “per 2nd map” in the special gaming state, “Aim at the left! An effect operation such as displaying an effect image indicating a notification message such as “” may be performed as a normal operation effect.

  After performing the start setting of the ordinary power operation effect in step S724, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” corresponding to the effect processing during the ordinary power operation (step S725), and then The operation start waiting process is terminated. In addition, when the general electric operation start waiting time has elapsed in step S721 (step S721; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0” (step S726), and then The operation start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure fluctuation effect setting process executed in step S165 of FIG. In the special figure variation effect setting process, the CPU 181 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S741). For example, in the process of step S741, the CPU 181 determines whether the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the special figure display result or the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated in the special figure fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 120. It may be determined whether or not.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit” in step S741 (step S741; Yes), the big hit effect control pattern stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. 20 is set (step S742).

  If the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S741 (step S741; No), for example, the special figure display result or special figure fluctuation pattern indicated in the special figure fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 120, for example. From the above, the small hit type indicating whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” to “fourth small hit” is specified (step S743). Subsequently, among the first to fourth small hit effect control patterns stored in the effect control pattern table 300 shown in FIG. 20, the small hit effect control pattern corresponding to the small hit type specified in step S743 is set. (Step S744).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S742 and S744, an effect control process timer corresponding to the effect period from when the special symbol change is started until the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed and the special symbol game ends. An initial value is set (step S745). For example, in the process of step S745, the CPU 181 specifies the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated in the special figure fluctuation start command. And as one of the processes which set the production time corresponding to the specified special figure fluctuation time, the production control process timer initial value is set. As an example, the CPU 181 sets a timer initial value corresponding to the specified special figure fluctuation time in the effect control process timer. Alternatively, the CPU 181 may set the effect control process timer setting value read from the effect control pattern set in either of the processes of steps S742 and S744 in the effect control process timer. In these cases, every time the special figure changing effect processing in step S166 shown in FIG. 37 is executed, for example, the value of the effect control process timer is updated by 1 and the value becomes “0”. It may be determined that the elapsed time since the change of the special symbol has reached the special symbol change time. As another example, the CPU 181 sets “0” as a timer initial value by clearing the effect control process timer, and sets a special figure change time effect end determination value corresponding to the special figure change time. Also good. In this case, every time the special-fluctuation effect process in step S166 shown in FIG. 37 is executed, for example, the value of the effect control process timer is updated so as to be incremented by 1, and the value ends when the special-figure fluctuation effect ends. When the determination value is reached, it may be determined that the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation has reached the special symbol variation time.

  After the effect control process timer initial value is set in step S745, for example, a display control command corresponding to the display control data included in the effect control pattern is sent from the output port included in the input / output port 185 to the display control unit 171. In response to the transmission, the setting for starting the special-figure variation effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special-figure game is performed (step S746). For example, when the big hit effect control pattern is set in the process of step S742, the special image variation effect is displayed by displaying an effect image indicating a message such as “hit” in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. While the effect of notifying that the opening 48 provided in the 2 special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is opened is performed, for example, when the first to fourth small hit effect control pattern is set in the process of step S744 Informing that the opening 82 provided in the first special variable winning ball device 66 is opened, for example, by displaying an effect image showing a message such as “Opening!” On the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. It is only necessary to produce an effect. After executing the process of step S746, the value of the effect control process timer is updated to “6” which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the special figure change (step S747), and the special figure change effect setting process is performed. finish.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, first, the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is controlled to the small hit game state in response to any one of “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. A control example in the case of FIG. 41 shows the operation timing of the start port switch 60, the special symbol display device 44a, the solenoid for opening / closing piece 105, the distribution when the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “second small hit”. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of control timing of the solenoid for motor 108 and the motor 127. In FIGS. 41A to 41F, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal variable winning ball apparatus is based on the fact that the normal map display result, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game, is "per 1st general figure" or "per 2nd general figure". When the ordinary induction member solenoid 59 is driven at 61 and the variable induction member 61 a advances, the game ball can enter the start area 56. At this time, the game ball that has entered the start area 56 is detected by the start port switch 60, and the detection signal output from the start port switch 60 is turned on as shown in FIG. Then, the special symbol game is started by the special symbol display device 44a, and the special symbol is variably displayed.

  At this time, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result obtained in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 25A, the special figure display result determining table shown in FIG. 8 in step S203. By referring to 200, it is assumed that it is determined that the display result type as a special figure display result is “first small hit” or “second small hit”. In this case, in the process of step S204, by referring to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 220 shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation pattern of “small hit A” as the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to “first small hit”. A pattern is determined, and a special figure fluctuation pattern of “small hit B” is determined as a special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to “second small hit”. When the special symbol variation pattern of “small hit A” or “small bonus B” is determined, the special symbol game is derived and displayed after the special symbol variation is started in the special symbol game. The special figure fluctuation time until the end is “5.0 seconds”.

  Further, the operation waiting time from when the game ball is detected by the start port switch 60 until the opening 82 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the start operation in the small hit game state is shown in step S206 in FIG. In this process, the special figure display result is set to “6.0 seconds” which is the start interval time determined corresponding to “first small hit” or “second small hit”. Here, the special symbol variation time which is the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game, or the waiting time after the special symbol variation in the special symbol game is stopped and the confirmed special symbol is displayed (for the first small hit time) Of the small hitting control pattern KP1 and the second small hitting control pattern KP2 for the small hitting control pattern KP2) is determined in advance so as to conform to the start interval time of “6.0 seconds”. ing. Thus, the operation standby time is for rotating the rotating body 79 by driving the motor 127 to return from an arbitrary rotation position to an initial position (a position where the center of the variable advance entrance 79a comes to the reference line L1 shown in FIG. 4). It will be longer than the required time. In the process of step S207, for example, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 200 shown in FIG. 8, a special symbol indicating “22” or “second small symbol” corresponding to “first small hit” is determined. A special symbol indicating “44” as a determined special symbol corresponding to “winning” is set in the scheduled stop symbol, so that a small winning symbol which is a variable display result in the special symbol game is determined.

  Based on these determination results and setting contents, the special symbol display device 44a is variable when “5.0 seconds” have elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. The confirmed special symbol that is the display result is stopped and displayed, and the special figure game is terminated. If the special figure display result is “first small hit”, the small hit control pattern KP1 for the first small hit is set in step S228 shown in FIG. 26, while the special figure display result. Is “second small hit”, the small hit control pattern KP2 for the second small hit is set in step S228 shown in FIG. In accordance with the drive pattern determined by the small hitting control pattern KP1 for the first small hitting time or the small hitting control pattern KP2 for the second small hitting time set in this way, a fixed special symbol is derived and displayed, and the special figure game is ended. Then, when a predetermined waiting time of, for example, 1.0 second has elapsed, the opening / closing operation is performed as shown in FIG. The driving of the solenoid 105 for the piece is started, and a starting operation is performed in which the opening / closing piece 81 makes the opening 82 serving as the first big prize opening from the closed state to the open state twice.

  In the driving patterns determined by the small hitting control pattern KP1 for the first small hitting time and the small hitting control pattern KP2 for the second small hitting time, for example, the solenoid for the opening / closing piece over a predetermined opening time such as “2.0 seconds”. The driving operation for driving the opening 105 to open the opening 82 stops the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 for a predetermined opening interval time such as “4.0 seconds” and closes the opening 82. Repeated twice over a period. More specifically, for example, in the process of step S242 shown in FIG. 27, corresponding to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the big winning opening opening determination value (step S242; Yes), FIG. As shown in the figure, after a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1.0 second) corresponding to the time for which the confirmed special symbol indicating the special figure display result is stopped and displayed after the special figure game is finished, The drive solenoid 105 is started to be driven (step S243). When the opening time such as “2.0 seconds” elapses after the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 starts to be driven, the game control process timer value is set to the big winning opening opening end determination value in the process of step S255 shown in FIG. In response to the match (step S255; Yes), the opening of the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is stopped, so that the opening 82 returns to the closed state (step S256). Thereafter, when the opening interval time such as “4.0 seconds” elapses, the driving of the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is similarly started to open the opening 82, and then “2.0 seconds”, for example. By stopping the driving of the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 in response to the elapse of the opening time, the driving operation for opening the opening 82 can be repeated twice.

  Further, the drive control of the sorting solenoid 108 is performed based on the setting in the small hitting control pattern KP1 for the first small hitting time and the small hitting control pattern KP2 for the second small hitting time. More specifically, for example, corresponding to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the distribution drive determination value in the process of step S245 shown in FIG. 27 (step S245; Yes), according to the first distribution operation pattern. The drive control of the sorting solenoid 108 is started (step S246). In this first distribution operation pattern, for example, in response to the opening 82 being changed from the closed state to the open state by the driving of the opening / closing piece solenoid 105, the distribution solenoid 108 is started to start the distribution. The member 83 is moved to the back side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to enter the second distribution state, and the game balls are distributed to the second area 88. Thereafter, when a predetermined advantageous allocation time such as “7.0 seconds” elapses, the game control process timer value matches the allocation stop determination value in the process of step S253 shown in FIG. S253; Yes), the drive control of the sorting solenoid 108 by the second sorting operation pattern is started (step S254). In the second distribution operation pattern, the distribution member 83 is moved to the front side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by stopping the driving of the distribution solenoid 108 to be in the first distribution state. The sphere is distributed to the first area 85.

  The game balls distributed to the first area 85 enter the first specific entrance 89 as the specific area with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second area 88 enter the second specific entrance 91 as the specific area with a probability of 3/4 when the rotating body 79 is rotating in the forward direction, Even when the rotator 79 is rotating in the reverse direction, it enters the second specific entrance 91 with a probability of 1/4. That is, the game balls distributed to the second area 88 enter the specific area with a higher probability than the game balls distributed to the first area 85. Therefore, when the driving control of the sorting solenoid 108 is performed with the first sorting operation pattern, the game ball easily enters the specific area, while the driving control of the sorting solenoid 108 is performed with the second sorting operation pattern. When performing, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area as compared with the first distribution operation pattern. In this way, in response to the start operation of changing the opening 82 serving as the first grand prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the movable portion is movable until an advantageous distribution time such as “7.0 seconds” elapses. The distribution member 83 as a member is operated in a first distribution operation pattern in which a game ball easily enters a specific area, and after the advantageous distribution time has elapsed, the game ball enters the specific area. The operation is performed in a difficult second distribution operation pattern.

  Further, the drive control of the motor 127 is performed based on the setting in the small hit control pattern KP1 for the first small hit and the small hit control pattern KP2 for the second small hit. More specifically, for example, corresponding to the fact that the game control process timer value matches the motor drive start determination value in the process of step S247 shown in FIG. 27 (step S247; Yes), the motor according to the first rotation pattern. The drive control 127 is started (step S248). In this first rotation pattern, for example, in response to the opening 82 being changed from the closed state to the opened state by the driving of the solenoid 105 for the opening / closing piece, the driving of the motor 127 is started by the forward rotation excitation signal. Thus, the rotating body 79 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (forward direction) indicated by the arrow A21 in FIG. Thereafter, for example, a predetermined advantageous rotation time such as “10.0 seconds” in the small hitting control pattern KP1 for the first small hitting time and “5.0 seconds” in the small hitting control pattern KP2 for the second small hitting time. When elapses, in response to the game control process timer value matching the motor drive switching determination value in the process of step S257 shown in FIG. 27 (step S257; Yes), the motor 127 is driven by the second rotation pattern. Switch to control. In this second rotation pattern, for example, the motor 127 is driven by a reverse rotation excitation signal to rotate the rotating body 79 in the reverse rotation direction (reverse direction) indicated by the arrow A22 in FIG.

  When the rotating body 79 is rotating in the forward direction, the game balls distributed to the second area 88 enter the second specific entrance 91 as the specific area with a probability of 3/4. On the other hand, when the rotating body 79 rotates in the reverse direction, the game balls distributed to the second area 88 enter the second specific entrance 91 with a probability of 1/4. That is, when the rotating body 79 is rotating in the forward direction, the game ball enters the specific area with a higher probability than when the rotating body 79 is rotating in the reverse direction. Accordingly, when the drive control of the motor 127 is performed with the first rotation pattern, the game ball easily enters the specific area, while when the drive control of the motor 127 is performed with the second rotation pattern, the first rotation is performed. The game ball is less likely to enter the specific area than the movement pattern. Thus, in response to the start operation starting from the closed state to the open state of the opening 82 serving as the first grand prize opening, an advantageous rotation such as “10.0 seconds” or “5.0 seconds” is performed. Until the time elapses, the rotating body 79 as a movable member is operated in the first rotation pattern in which the game ball easily enters the specific area, and after the advantageous rotation time has elapsed, the game ball specifies the rotating body 79. It operates with the second rotation pattern that is difficult to enter the region. The advantageous rotation time for operating the motor 127 and the rotating body 79 in the first rotation pattern is “10.0 seconds” in the small hitting control pattern KP1 for the first small hitting time, while the second One of a plurality of predetermined types corresponding to the small hit symbol that is a variable display result in the special figure game, such as “5.0 seconds” in the small hit control pattern KP2 for the small hit time. To be determined. In other words, by setting the small hit control pattern corresponding to the small hit type in the process of step S228 shown in FIG. 26, the rotating body 79 as the movable member is advantageously operated in an operation mode in which the game ball easily enters the specific area. The rotation time can be determined as one of a plurality of predetermined types corresponding to the small hit symbol that is a variable display result in the special figure game.

  When a game ball enters the first specific entrance 89, referring to a round number determination table 230 as shown in FIG. 12 based on numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the number of rounds, the big hit gaming state The maximum number of round games to be continued (maximum round value) is determined to be “1”, “3”, or “5” (steps S523 and S524 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second specific entrance 91, the round control pattern RP2-1 is set, so that the maximum number of round games in the big hit gaming state is determined to be "15". (Step S528 in FIG. 30). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second specific entrance 91, the game state is more advantageous for the player than when the game ball enters the first specific entrance 89. That is, in the period until the advantageous rotation time in which the driving operation of the motor 127 is performed with the first rotation pattern for rotating the rotating body 79 in the forward direction, the rotating body 79 is rotated in the reverse direction thereafter. Compared with the period during which the motor 127 is driven with the second rotation pattern to be performed, the game ball can easily enter the second specific entrance 91 that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific entrance 89. The advantageous rotation time during which the motor 127 and the rotating body 79 are operated in the first rotation pattern is “10.0 seconds” in the small hitting control pattern KP1 for the first small hitting time. One of a plurality of predetermined types corresponding to the small hit symbol that is a variable display result in the special figure game, such as “5.0 seconds” in the small hit control pattern KP2 for the small hit time. To be determined. That is, by setting a small hitting control pattern corresponding to the small hitting type in the process of step S228 shown in FIG. 26, the rotating body 79 as the movable member is more advantageous to the player than the first specific entrance 89. The advantageous rotation time for operating the game ball in an operation mode in which the game ball easily enters the specific entrance 91 is set to any one of a plurality of predetermined types corresponding to a small hit symbol that is a variable display result in a special game. Can be determined.

  For example, in response to the game control process timer value matching the storage drive start determination value in the processing of step S249 shown in FIG. 27 (step S249; Yes), the storage solenoid 118 starts driving (step S250). ). As a result, the storage plate 118b advances at the upper part of the first specific entry port 89, whereby a storage state in which the game ball dropped from the rolling plate is stored. After that, for example, in response to the game control process timer value matching the storage release determination value in the process of step S259 shown in FIG. 27 (step S259; Yes), the storage solenoid 118 is stopped to stop the storage. The plate 118b is retracted (step S260). At this time, the game ball stored by the storage plate 118b enters the first specific entrance 89.

  When it is determined in the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 28 that there is no game ball in the first special variable winning ball device 66 in correspondence with the remaining ball count value being “0”, step By executing the process of S264, the drive operation of the sorting solenoid 108 is stopped, and by executing the process of step S265, the rotating body 79 rotated by the drive operation of the motor 127 in the small hit gaming state. Specify the amount of rotation. Based on the rotation amount specified at this time, the process of step S266 is executed to set the motor return control timer value and the motor rotation direction pattern. After these settings are made, the process of step S154 is executed until the motor return control timer value becomes “0” in step S153 shown in FIG. Rotate in the forward or reverse direction to return the rotational position to the initial position.

  FIG. 42F shows an example of the driving operation of the motor 127 in the small hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “first small hit”. In this driving operation example, at the timing Ti01 corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 60 shown in FIG. 42 (A), the special symbol display device 44a has a special symbol as shown in FIG. 42 (B). The fluctuation starts. After the special symbol variation time “5.0 seconds” has elapsed from the timing Ti01, the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed and the variation of the special symbol is finished. Then, the timing is the start interval time from the timing Ti01. At timing Ti03 when “6.0 seconds” have elapsed, the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is driven to open the opening 82 as shown in FIG. 42C, and the opening 82 is opened as shown in FIG. As shown, the motor 127 starts the drive control by the first rotation pattern that rotates the rotating body 79 in the forward direction.

  Then, for example, when the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is turned on at timing Ti04 as shown in FIG. 42D, a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected. After that, in response to the elapsed time from timing Ti03 reaching “10.0 seconds” as the advantageous rotation time at timing Ti05, the motor 127 rotates the rotating body 79 in the reverse direction. Switch to drive control with the rotation pattern. Subsequently, until it is determined that there is no game ball in the first special variable winning ball device 66 based on the detection of the game ball by the discharge ball detector 122 as shown in FIG. In step S262, the motor 127 rotates the rotating body 79 in the reverse direction until the timing Ti06 (the elapsed time T1 from the timing Ti05) at which the remaining ball count value is determined to be “0”.

  In the driving operation example shown in FIG. 42, when the timing Ti06 is reached, the process of step S266 is executed based on the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 specified by executing the process of step S265 shown in FIG. A motor return control timer initial value corresponding to a required time T2 for returning the rotator 79 to the initial position and a motor rotation direction pattern for rotating the rotator 79 in the reverse direction are set. By such setting, the motor 127 rotates the rotating body 79 in the reverse direction until the timing Ti08 when the required time T2 elapses from the timing Ti06, and the rotating body 79 is returned to the initial position. When the timing Ti08 is reached, the process of step S155 is executed in response to the determination that the motor return control timer value is “0” in step S153 shown in FIG. Stop driving.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the start area 56 is detected by the start port switch 60, the special symbol display device 44a starts the special game, and then starts the first big winning port by the start operation in the small hit game state. The starting interval time T3, which is the time until the opening 82 is opened, is set to be longer than the maximum required time until the rotating body 79 returns from the arbitrary rotational position to the initial position. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 42A, at a timing Ti07 that is very close to the timing Ti06 when it is determined that there is no gaming ball in the first special variable winning ball device 66 and the small hit gaming state is ended. In response to the fact that the special symbol display device 44a based on the fact that the start port switch 60 has detected a game ball is started and the variable display result is “small hit”, the start operation is started at timing Ti09. Even when started, the rotating body 79 can be rotated from the initial position at the start of the starting operation.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the small hit gaming state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3” in the process of step S232 shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 42A, at the timing Ti01 corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 60, the special figure display result in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 42B, the special symbol display device 44a is based on the determination of “one small hit” or the determination that the special figure fluctuation pattern in the process of step S204 is the special figure fluctuation pattern of “small hit A”. The special symbol changes at. After that, at timing Ti02 when “5.0 seconds” which is the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern of “small hit A” has elapsed from timing Ti01, the small hit as the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result The symbol “22” is stopped and displayed, and the special game ends. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3” by executing the process of step S232 shown in FIG.

  In this way, by setting the value of the special figure process flag to “3”, the processing of steps S52 to S56 shown in FIG. 22 is not executed (step S51; Yes), and the open state is started by the start operation in the small hit gaming state. The game ball that enters the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 from the opening 82 as the first big winning hole is not detected as an abnormal winning ball. For example, as shown in FIG. 42D, when a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected by the first count switch 106 at the timing Ti04, the value of the special figure process flag is set. Since it is “3”, the process of step S52 shown in FIG. 22 is not performed, so that an error determination that makes this game ball an abnormal winning ball is not performed. On the other hand, since the value of the special figure process flag is less than “4”, the processes in steps S58 to S60 shown in FIG. 22 can be executed. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is detected by the second count switch 52 (step S58; Yes), the payout of the winning ball is prohibited (step S59). Notification that an abnormal winning ball has occurred, such as displaying a second abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23B on the effect display device 44b, is performed.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 42E, at the timing Ti06 corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the discharge ball detector 122, the remaining ball count updated in the process of step S513 shown in FIG. In response to determining that the value is “0” in the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 28, the specific winning determination process of step S263 is executed. When this specific winning determination process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” by the process of step S531 shown in FIG. 30, and the special figure process flag value is changed by the process of step S533. One of updating to “0” is performed. As an example, the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 does not enter either the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 that is the specific area, and the first normal entrance 94a. , 94b or the second normal advance entrance 94c and is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66, the process of step S533 is executed to set the special figure process flag. The value is updated to “0”. Thus, after the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 opened in the starting operation is detected by the first count switch 106, the first count switch 106 and the discharge are released. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to a value other than “3” when the remaining ball count value updated in response to the detection of the game ball by the ball detector 122 becomes “0”, the first After it is determined that there is no game ball in the special variable winning ball device 66, the processing of steps S52 to S56 shown in FIG. 22 can be executed (step S51; Yes), and thereafter, the first special variable winning ball device. An error determination is made with the game ball that has entered the interior of 66 as an abnormal winning ball.

  At this time, when the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is detected by the first count switch 106 (step S52 in FIG. 22; Yes), the payout of the winning ball is prohibited (step S52). S55), for example, displaying a first abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23 (A) on the effect display device 44b is notified that an abnormal winning ball has occurred (step S56). Further, even if a game ball that has entered the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 that is a specific area is detected by the first specific ball detector 121a or the second specific ball detector 121b (step of FIG. 22). S53; Yes or Step S54; Yes), a notification that an abnormal winning ball has occurred, for example, prohibiting the payout of a prize ball and displaying a first abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. Done.

  Also, when it is determined that the variable display result in the special figure game is “small hit”, whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. In accordance with the determination result, the control timing of the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 and the sorting solenoid 108 is varied to vary the operation modes of the opening / closing piece 81 and the sorting member 83 which are movable members other than the rotating body 79. You may do it. As an example, FIG. 43 shows the operation timing of the start port switch 60, the special symbol display device 44 a, and the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 when the special figure display result is “third small hit” or “fourth small hit”. 4 is a timing chart showing control timing of the distribution solenoid 108. 43A to 43E, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time. In the small hit game state based on the special figure display result as the variable display result in the special figure game being “third small hit” or “fourth small hit”, the remaining ball in step S262 in FIG. The motor 127 rotates the rotating body 79 in the forward direction until the number count value is determined to be “0”, and in response to the remaining ball number count value being determined to be “0”, the rotating body 79 is moved. The driving of the motor 127 may be stopped after returning to the initial position.

  In the process of step S204 shown in FIG. 25A, the special figure fluctuation pattern of “small hit C” is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to “third small hit”, and corresponds to “fourth small hit”. As the special figure fluctuation pattern, a special figure fluctuation pattern of “small hit D” is determined. When the special figure fluctuation pattern of “small hit C” or “small hit D” is determined, the special figure fluctuation time becomes “7.0 seconds” (see FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 25 (B), when it is determined that the special figure display result is “third small hit”, the start interval time as the operation standby time is set to “9.0 seconds”. Is done. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure display result is “fourth small hit”, the start interval time is set to “12.0 seconds”. Special figure variation time in the special figure game and waiting time after the confirmed special symbol is displayed (a big winning in the small hit control pattern KP3 for the third small hit time and the small hit control pattern KP4 for the fourth small hit time) The mouth opening start determination value) is determined in advance so as to match the start interval time. Thus, even when the special figure display result is “third small hit” or “fourth small hit”, the operation standby time is determined by rotating the rotating body 79 by driving the motor 127 to the initial position. It takes longer than the time required to return to the position where the center of the variable entrance 79a comes to the reference line L1 shown in FIG. In the process of step S207 shown in FIG. 25A, a special symbol indicating "66" as a fixed special symbol corresponding to "third small hit" or "88" as a fixed special symbol corresponding to "fourth small hit". Is set as the scheduled stop symbol, and the small hit symbol that is the variable display result in the special symbol game is determined.

  Based on these determination results and setting contents, the special symbol display device 44a is variable when “7.0 seconds” have elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. The confirmed special symbol that is the display result is stopped and displayed, and the special figure game is terminated. When the special figure display result is “third small hit”, the small hit control pattern KP3 for the third small hit is set, while the special figure display result is “fourth small hit”. In this case, the small hitting control pattern KP4 for the fourth small hitting time is set (step S228 in FIG. 26). In the driving pattern defined by the small hitting control pattern KP3 for the third small hitting time, when the determined special symbol is derived and displayed and 2.0 seconds have elapsed after the special drawing game is over, the start interval time and In response to the elapse of “9.0 seconds”, the driving of the solenoid 105 for the opening / closing piece is started as shown in FIG. 43C, and the opening 82 where the opening / closing piece 81 becomes the first big prize opening. Is started twice from the closed state to the open state. In the driving pattern defined by the small hitting control pattern KP4 for the fourth small hitting time, when the determined special symbol is derived and displayed and 5.0 seconds have elapsed after the special drawing game is over, the start interval time and In response to the elapse of “12.0 seconds”, the driving of the solenoid for opening / closing piece 105 is started as shown in FIG.

  Further, the drive control of the sorting solenoid 108 is performed based on the setting in the small hitting control pattern KP3 for the third small hitting time and the small hitting control pattern KP4 for the fourth small hitting time. Here, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), the special symbol display device is used for both the small hit control pattern KP3 for the third small hit and the small hit control pattern KP4 for the fourth small hit. At the timing when “9.0 seconds” have elapsed since the start of the special game by 44a, the drive control of the sorting solenoid 108 by the first sorting operation pattern is started. Thus, by starting the driving of the distribution solenoid 108, the distribution member 83 is set to the second distribution state, and the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 are distributed to the second area 88. . Thereafter, when a predetermined advantageous distribution time such as “1.0 second” elapses, drive control of the distribution solenoid 108 by the second distribution operation pattern is started. Thus, by stopping the driving of the distribution solenoid 108, the distribution member 83 is set to the first distribution state, and the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 are distributed to the first area 85. .

  In the small hit gaming state based on whether the special figure display result is “third small hit” or “fourth small hit”, the period during which the distribution solenoid 108 is driven, that is, the distribution member 83 is The period during which the game balls are controlled to be distributed to the second area 88 in the second distribution state is the same. In the small hit gaming state based on the result that the special figure display result is “third small hit”, the distribution solenoid 108 is driven within the period in which the opening 82 is opened for the first time. . Therefore, in the small hit gaming state based on the result that the special figure display result is “third small hit”, when the opening 82 is opened for the first time, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is placed inside. The game balls that have entered can be distributed to the second area 88. On the other hand, in the small hit gaming state based on the special figure display result of “fourth small hit”, the sorting solenoid 108 is driven before the opening 82 is opened for the first time. Then, the drive is stopped and the sorting solenoid 108 is not driven thereafter. Therefore, in the small hit game state based on the result that the special figure display result is “fourth small hit”, the game that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 when the opening 82 is opened. The sphere cannot be distributed to the second region 88. In addition, it is completely impossible (0%) to distribute the game balls to the second area 88 in the small hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “fourth small hit”. In the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the special figure display result is "fourth small hit", the small hit gaming state based on the special figure display result is "third small hit" In comparison, any game ball may be used as long as it is difficult to distribute the game ball to the second region 88. Thus, in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the special figure display result is "third small hit" and the small hit gaming state based on the special figure display result is "fourth small hit", The probability that the game ball enters a specific area including the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91, and the game ball at the second specific entrance 91 that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific entrance 89 The probability of entering can be varied.

  Next, a description will be given of a control example in the case of being controlled to the big hit gaming state in response to the special figure display result that is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game being “big hit”. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the start opening switch 60 and the control timing of the special symbol display device 44a and the second big prize opening door solenoid 65 when the special figure display result is “big hit”. It is. 44A to 44C, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 44A, at the timing Ti11 corresponding to the detection signal output from the start port switch 60 being turned on, a special chart in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. Based on the determination that the display result is “big hit”, the determination that the special figure fluctuation pattern in the processing of step S204 is the special figure fluctuation pattern of “big hit”, and the like, as shown in FIG. 44B, a special symbol display device 44a. The special symbol changes at. Here, the special chart fluctuation pattern of “big hit” is determined by referring to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 220 shown in FIG. 10 in the process of step S204 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern is determined, the special symbol variation time from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalization of the special symbol game after the special symbol symbol is derived and displayed is “9.6 seconds” "

  Thereafter, at timing Ti12 when the special figure fluctuation time “9.6 seconds” corresponding to the special jack fluctuation pattern of “big hit” has elapsed from timing Ti11, the big hit symbol “77” as the determined special symbol that becomes the variable display result. "Is stopped and displayed, and the special figure game ends. In this way, when the special figure game whose special figure display result is “big hit” is finished, the control to enter the small hit game state is not performed, and the game that has entered the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 that becomes the specific area. Regardless of whether or not the sphere is detected by the first specific sphere detector 121a or the second specific sphere detector 121b, the control for setting the big hit gaming state is started. That is, after setting the round control pattern RP1-1 in the process of step S222 shown in FIG. 26, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” in the process of step S226. Then, in the big hit gaming state, the second special variable is performed by performing drive control of the second grand prize opening door solenoid 65 according to the drive pattern defined by the round control pattern RP1-1 set in the process of step S222. A round game is performed in which the opening 48 as the second big prize opening provided in the winning ball apparatus 47 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing plate 49 and then returned to the closed state again after a predetermined time.

  By setting the value of the special figure process flag to “4” in this way, the processing of steps S58 to S60 shown in FIG. 22 is not executed (step S57; Yes), and the game is opened in the round game in the big hit gaming state. A game ball that enters the inside of the second special variable winning ball device 47 through the opening 48 as the second big winning hole is not detected as an abnormal winning ball. On the other hand, since the value of the special figure process flag is a value other than “3”, the processes in steps S52 to S56 shown in FIG. 22 can be executed. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected by the first count switch 106 (step S52; Yes), the game ball that has entered the first specific entrance 89 is the first. When it is detected by the specific ball detector 121a (step S53; Yes), or when a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 91 is detected by the second specific ball detector 121b (step S54; Yes). The payout of the winning ball is prohibited (step S55), and a notification that an abnormal winning ball has occurred, for example, a first abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23A is displayed on the effect display device 44b. Is done.

  When the round game is repeatedly executed in the big hit game state, the round number count value reaches the round maximum value “15” corresponding to the maximum number of continuations, and the big hit end waiting time elapses (step S311 in FIG. 31; Yes), step The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” by the process of S314. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 44B, the value of the special figure process flag becomes “0” at the timing Ti14. Thus, when the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the special figure process flag becomes a value less than “4”, so that the processing of steps S58 to S60 shown in FIG. 22 can be executed (step S57; Yes), and thereafter In the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47, an error determination is made such that the game ball that has entered the inside of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 becomes an abnormal winning ball.

  For example, when a game ball that has entered the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 after the timing Ti14 is detected by the second count switch 52 (step S58 in FIG. 22; Yes), the payout of the winning ball is prohibited. (Step S59), for example, a notification that an abnormal winning ball has occurred, such as displaying a second abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23B on the effect display device 44b, is made (Step S60).

  Next, a game ball enters the start area 56 in response to the fact that the usual figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the usual figure game, is “per 1st ordinary figure” or “per 2nd ordinary figure”. An example of control when it becomes possible will be described. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the gate switch 58a and the control timing of the normal symbol display device 63 and the normal electric accessory solenoid 59 when the normal diagram display result is “per 1st normal diagram”. It is a chart. 45A to 45C, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 58 is detected by the gate switch 58a, and the detection signal output from the gate switch 58a is turned on as shown in FIG. At the timing Ti21, the normal game is started by the normal symbol display device 63, and the normal symbol is variably displayed. At this time, for example, the advantageous state flag is off based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the general-purpose display result determination read from the general-purpose display storage unit 161 in the process of step S351 shown in FIG. Depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal game state or a special game state, the normal time normal map display result determination set in the process of step S354 By referring to the table 210A or the advantageous time general map display result determination table 210B set in the process of step S355, the display result type to be the general map display result is “per 1st normal map”, “per 2nd general map”. ”Or“ ordinary map loss ”is determined (step S356). Then, in the process of step S358, by referring to the common figure variation pattern determination table 221 shown in FIG. 11, the common figure display results are obtained as "per first figure", "per second figure", and "missed figure". Depending on the result of the determination of whether or not the advantageous state flag is off or on, a different normal fluctuation pattern is determined. For example, when the advantageous state flag is off, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal gaming state, and the determination is made that the usual figure display result is “per first figure”, It is determined to be a general pattern fluctuation pattern of “A per general map”. When the normal pattern change pattern of “A per 1st normal figure” is determined, the normal figure change is derived and displayed after starting the normal symbol change in the normal game, and the normal game ends. The normal fluctuation time until "10.5 seconds".

  Based on these determination results and determination results, the normal symbol display device 63 is variable at timing Ti22 when 10.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of normal symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), for example. The confirmed normal symbol that is the display result is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary game is terminated. Further, in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol variable display sections correspond to the start of the change of the normal symbol in the regular game. In response to the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, the fixed normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 63, and the ordinary symbol game is terminated, each of the decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” is variable. The confirmed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit. For example, when the normal figure display result is “per 1st normal figure”, the determined decorative symbol that is the first winning combination is determined in the process of step S702 shown in FIG. An effect control pattern per ordinary map is determined. On the other hand, when the normal map display result is “per 2nd general map”, in the process of step S705, a determined decorative design that is a second hit combination different from the first hit combination is determined, In the process of step S706, an effect control pattern for the second common map is determined. Thereby, during the variable display of the decorative design, the variable display mode of the decorative design in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, the display mode of the effect image other than the decorative design, the audio output mode from the speakers 12a and 12b, various The general-purpose display results of various effect operation modes such as the lighting effect modes of the game effect LED lamps 13, 14a to 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b and the various decoration LED lamps 32 are "per 1st normal map". It can be made different depending on whether it is “per second map”.

  As shown in FIG. 45B, when the usual game is finished at the timing Ti22, the process of step S376 shown in FIG. As a result, the value of the usual process flag is updated to “4”. Also, when the normal map display result is “per second normal map”, the process of step S376 is executed and the value of the normal map process flag is updated to “4”. Thus, by setting the value of the normal process flag to “4”, the processing of steps S62 to S64 shown in FIG. 22 is not executed (step S61; Yes), and the start formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is started. A game ball that has entered the area 56 is not detected as an abnormal winning ball.

  As shown in FIG. 45C, at a timing Ti23 when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing Ti22 (a timing when 11 seconds have elapsed from the timing Ti21), a normal display is displayed in the normal gaming state. Based on the setting in the general electric operation pattern FA1-1 corresponding to the result “per 1st general map”, the drive of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is started, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, when the variable guiding member 61a advances, a game ball can enter the start area 56. Further, even when the normal map display result is “per second normal map”, the variable induction member is started by starting the driving of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric utility based on the setting in the general electric operation pattern FA1-2. When 61a advances, a game ball can be placed in the starting area 56. In this way, when the normal electric accessory solenoid 59 is driven to allow the game ball to enter the start area 56, even if the game ball is detected by the start port switch 60, the value of the usual process flag is “4”. For this reason, since the processing of steps S62 to S64 shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, for example, when a game ball is not detected by the start port switch 60, as shown in FIG. 45C, the elapsed time from the timing Ti23 when the drive of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is started is the normal gaming state. At the timing Ti24 that reaches “5 seconds” as the possible winning time corresponding to the fact that the normal figure display result is “per 1st normal figure” in FIG. Setting is made such that the game ball cannot enter the area 56. Further, after starting the driving of the ordinary electric utility solenoid 59 in response to the normal display result being “per second general map”, the elapsed time from the start timing is normal in the normal gaming state. At the timing when “0.1 second” is reached as the possible winning time corresponding to the display result being “per second map”, the drive of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped and the start area 56 The game ball is set to be inaccessible. In this way, when the base map display result is “per 1st base map” in the normal game state, the base map display result is “per base 2” in the normal game state. In a manner that is advantageous to the player, a guiding operation is performed in which the variable guiding member 61a is advanced to allow the game ball to enter the starting area 56.

  In the control example shown in FIG. 45, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “0” at a timing Ti25 when a predetermined effective induction time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing Ti24. In this way, when the drive of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped, the value of the general process flag is updated to a value other than “4”, thereby making it possible to execute the processes of steps S62 to S64 shown in FIG. Step S61; Yes), and thereafter, an error determination is made in which the game ball that has entered the starting area 56 is an abnormal winning ball.

  For example, when a game ball that has entered the start area 56 after the timing Ti25 is detected by the start port switch 60 (step S62 in FIG. 22; Yes), payout of prize balls is prohibited (step S63). A notification that an abnormal winning ball has occurred, such as displaying a third abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23 (C) on the effect display device 44b, is made (step S64).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the first specific entrance 89 and the specific area that becomes the big hit gaming state when the game ball enters the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 A second specific entrance 91 is provided. Here, the first specific entrance 89 is provided in the first area 85, and the second specific entrance 91 is provided in the second area 88 that is more likely to be a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first area 85. ing. In the second area 88, when the variable display result in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 44a is "small hit", the opening 82 is changed from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 105 for the opening / closing piece. Corresponding to the above, the driving of the motor 127 is started to rotate the rotating body 79. When the rotating body 79 is rotating in the forward direction, the game ball is likely to enter the second specific entrance 91 as compared to when rotating in the reverse direction. Thereby, the fun of the game based on the behavior of the game ball inside the first special variable winning ball device 66 can be realized.

  Thereafter, in the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 28, it is determined that there is no game ball in the first special variable winning ball device 66 in response to the remaining ball count value being “0”. Based on the processing of step S265, the rotation amount of the motor 127 and the rotating body 79 is specified, and the motor return control timer initial value and the motor rotation direction pattern corresponding to the rotation amount specified by the processing of step S266 are set. Based on this setting, until the motor return control timer value is determined to be “0” in step S153 shown in FIG. 35, the drive setting of the motor 127 according to the motor rotation direction pattern is performed in the process of step S154. Thus, the rotator 79 can be returned from the arbitrary rotation position to the initial position. If it is determined in step S153 that the motor return control timer value is “0” in response to the return of the rotating body 79 to the initial position, the process of step S155 is executed to drive the motor 127. In addition, the rotation operation of the rotating body 79 can be stopped. Thereby, compared with the case where the motor 127 is always driven and the rotary body 79 is rotated, power consumption can be reduced.

  When the variable display result in the special figure game is “small hit”, the start interval is an operation standby time from when the game ball is detected by the start port switch 60 until the opening 82 is opened by the start operation. The special figure change time in the special figure game and the small hit game state so that the time becomes longer than the time required for rotating the rotating body 79 by driving the motor 127 to return from the arbitrary rotational position to the initial position. The waiting time until the game control process timer value matches the big winning opening opening determination value is set. Thereby, at the start of the starting operation for opening the opening 82 in the small hit gaming state, the rotating body 79 can always be rotated from the initial position, and the fairness of the game in the starting operation can be maintained. . In addition, the probability that a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the opening 82 in the small hit game state enters the second specific entrance 91 that is a specific area and enters the big hit game state is determined as a pachinko game. The value can be kept close to the design value in the development stage of the machine 1. Then, in response to the end of the small hit gaming state, by executing a control for returning the rotating body 79 to the initial position when there is no gaming ball inside the first special variable winning ball device 66, During the operation for returning the rotator 79 to the initial position, the game ball does not enter the movable advance entrance 79a and is guided to the second specific entrance 91, and the game is performed by returning the rotator 79 to the initial position. It is possible to prevent the progress of the process from being affected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the special figure game started based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start area 56 by the start port switch 60, the special figure display result changes from “first small hit” to “fourth”. Corresponding to one of “small win”, the opening portion 82 as the first big prize opening provided in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing piece 81 and then closed. The starting operation is executed. In this starting operation, the game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 from the opening 82 enters the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 and enters the first specific ball detector. Corresponding to the detection by 121a or the second specific ball detector 121b, control to the big hit gaming state is started. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the control to the big hit gaming state is performed regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91. Is started. Here, in the normal game state, when the base map display result is “per 1st base map”, the base ball is allowed to enter the start area 56 by the first guiding operation that is advantageous to the player. The drive control of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is performed according to the setting in the electric operation pattern FA1-1. On the other hand, in the normal game state, when the base map display result is “per second base”, the game ball can enter the start area 56 by the second guide operation which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first guide operation. Thus, the drive control of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory is performed according to the setting in the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-2. In addition, when the normal figure display result is “per 1st normal figure”, the fixed decorative pattern that is the first winning combination is determined in the process of step S702 shown in FIG. 38, and the first symbol is determined in the process of step S703. An effect control pattern per ordinary map is determined. On the other hand, when the normal map display result is “per 2nd general map”, in the process of step S705, a determined decorative design that is a second hit combination different from the first hit combination is determined, In the process of step S706, an effect control pattern for the second common map is determined. Thus, during variable display of decorative symbols, the variable display mode of decorative symbols in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, the display mode of effect images other than the decorative symbols, the sound output mode from the speakers 12a and 12b, and various games The effect display modes such as the effect LED / lamps 13, 14 a to 14 d, 16 a, 16 b, 17 a, 17 b and the lighting operation modes of various decorative LEDs / lamps 32 are displayed as “per 1st map”. Different depending on whether there is "per second map". Further, in the big hit game state, the round game in which the opening portion 48 as the second big prize opening provided in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing plate 49, For example, it can be continued repeatedly until the maximum number of times “15” is reached. As a result, it is possible to control to the big hit game state in various game progresses, and according to various effect operation modes during the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in response to the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal game. Thus, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first guidance operation, which is more advantageous than the second guidance operation for the player, is performed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the process of step S228 shown in FIG. 26, any one of the small hit control patterns KP1 to KP4 corresponds to the special figure display result being either “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. Set. Based on the small hitting control patterns KP1 to KP4 set at this time, the processing of steps S245 to S248, the processing of S253 and S254, the processing of S257 and S258 shown in FIG. Drive control of the motor 127 is performed. Here, in each of the small hitting control patterns KP1 to KP4, the distribution solenoid 108 and the motor 127 are connected to the first distribution operation pattern and the first pattern until the predetermined time such as the advantageous distribution time and the advantageous rotation time elapses. A setting for driving in a first operation pattern such as one rotation pattern is included. Also included is a setting for switching the first operation pattern to a second operation pattern such as a second distribution operation pattern or a second rotation pattern after a predetermined time has elapsed. In the first action pattern and the second action pattern, the probability that the game ball enters one of the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91 in the specific area, or the first specific entrance 89 The probability that a game ball enters the second specific entrance 91 that is more advantageous than the second specific entrance 91 is made different. Thereby, in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “small hit”, when the start operation is performed to open the opening 82 serving as the first big winning opening, It is possible to provide a period during which the game ball is likely to enter the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91, which are specific areas, and a period during which it is difficult to enter, thereby improving the interest of the game by changing the game. be able to.

  The rotating body 79 as a movable member is configured to be rotatable by the driving force of the motor 127. In the first rotation pattern, the motor 127 rotates the rotating body 79 in the forward direction, and in the second rotation pattern, the motor 127 rotates the rotating body 79 in the reverse direction. Thereby, the player can easily recognize whether the game ball distributed to the second area 88 is an operation pattern that is easy to enter the second specific entrance 91 or an operation pattern that is difficult to enter. Further, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the second specific entrance 91 as a specific area and enter into the big hit game state, and improve the interest of the game.

  Long advantageous rotation time for rotating the motor 127 and the rotating body 79 in the first rotation pattern depending on whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “second small hit”. It is different. In addition, when the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “second small hit” and “third small hit” or “fourth small hit”, the sorting solenoid 108 is set to the first. The length of the distribution drive time for driving the distribution member 83 in the second distribution state by driving with one distribution operation pattern is varied. Further, depending on whether the special figure display result is “third small hit” or “fourth small hit”, the timing at which the opening 82 is opened or closed by driving the solenoid for opening and closing piece 105 is set. It is different. In this way, depending on whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “fourth small hit” when the variable display result in the special figure game is “small hit”. The timing at which the game ball can enter the special variable winning ball device 66, the probability that the game ball will enter a specific area including the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91, the first specific entrance By varying the probability that a game ball will enter the second specific entrance 91 that is advantageous to the player compared to 89, the game when the first special variable winning ball device 66 is started is varied. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the process of step S359 shown in FIG. 33A, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal gaming state by referring to the common figure variation pattern determination table 221 as shown in FIG. Is determined to be “per 1st map”, the normal map change time is set to “10.5 seconds”, and the map display result is determined to be “per 2nd map”. In the case of failure, the normal time fluctuation time is set to “15.5 seconds”. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the special gaming state, if the result of the normal map display is determined to be “per 1st normal map”, the normal map change time is set to “2.5 seconds”. Then, when it is determined that the normal map display result is “per second normal map”, the normal map change time is set to “3.5 seconds”. With these settings, in the special game state, the normal symbol changes in the general game when either “per 1st general diagram” or “per 2nd general diagram” is determined as the general map display result. The normal figure change time from when the determined normal symbol is derived and displayed is changed as compared with the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the special gaming state, referring to the advantageous time diagram display result determination table 210B set in step S355 shown in FIG. 33A corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state flag is ON, in step S356 While the process determines the normal map display result, while in the normal gaming state, refer to the normal time normal map display result determination table 210A set in step S354 corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state flag is OFF. In step S356, the map display result is determined. Based on the determination of the general map display result based on these settings, in the special gaming state, the probability that either “per 1st general map” or “per 2nd general map” is determined as the normal map display result is It can be changed compared to the gaming state.

  Further, in the process of step S372 shown in FIG. 34, when the advantageous state flag is OFF, the normal power operation pattern FA1-1 corresponding to the determination that the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map” is set. Then, when the advantageous state flag is on, the general electric operation pattern FA2-1 corresponding to the determination that the normal map display result is “per first general map” is set. On the other hand, in the process of step S374, when the advantageous state flag is OFF, the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-2 corresponding to the determination that the result of displaying the normal map is “per second figure” is set, while the advantageous state is set. When the flag is on, the normal operation pattern FA2-2 corresponding to the determination that the normal map display result is "per second general map" is set. Based on the setting of the normal electric operation pattern, the ordinary electric accessory operation processing in step S144 shown in FIG. 32 is executed, and in the special gaming state, “per second electric diagram” is determined as the normal display result. At this time, it is possible to change the winning time during which the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 59 is driven to allow the game ball to enter the starting area 56 as compared with the normal gaming state.

  Thus, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state, the base map display result is either “per 1st base map” or “per 2nd base map”. The game content is changed by changing the normal time fluctuation time, the determination probability of each normal figure display result, the winning time, etc., when the game is determined. It is possible to make it easier to enter the game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game according to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When the control to the small hit gaming state is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3” in the process of step S232 shown in FIG. 26, and when the small hit gaming state is ended, FIG. The process of updating the special figure process flag value to “4” in step S531 and the process of updating the special figure process flag value to “0” in step S533 are performed. Is called. Then, when the value of the special figure process flag is a value other than “3”, the processing of steps S52 to S56 shown in FIG. 22 is made possible to enter the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66. It is possible to make an error determination that makes the game ball an abnormal winning ball. If an error determination is made with an abnormal winning ball in this way, an abnormal operation such as displaying a first abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23A on the effect display device 44b by the process of step S56, for example. A notification that a winning ball has been generated is issued. Thereby, the illegal act by the abnormal approach of the game ball to the first special variable winning ball device 66 can be prevented.

  When the control to the big hit game state is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” by the process of step S226 shown in FIG. 26 or the process of step S531 shown in FIG. When the state ends, the value of the special figure process flag becomes “4” or more until the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” by the process of step S314 shown in FIG. Then, when the value of the special figure process flag is less than “4”, the processing of steps S58 to S60 shown in FIG. 22 is made possible to enter the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47. It is possible to make an error determination that makes the game ball an abnormal winning ball. When the error determination as an abnormal winning ball is thus performed, an abnormality such as displaying a second abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23B on the effect display device 44b by the process of step S60, for example. A notification that a winning ball has been generated is issued. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal act caused by an abnormal game ball entering the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47.

  When the game ball can enter the starting area 56 by starting the driving of the solenoid 59 for the ordinary electric accessory and causing the variable guiding member 61a to advance, the process flag in the step S376 shown in FIG. Is updated to “4”, and after the game ball is not allowed to enter the start area 56 in the normal electric accessory operation processing in step S144 shown in FIG. Updated. Then, when the value of the normal process flag is a value other than “4”, the processing of steps S62 to S64 shown in FIG. Can be determined. If the error determination is made as an abnormal winning ball in this way, an abnormality such as displaying a third abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 23C on the effect display device 44b by the process of step S64, for example. A notification that a winning ball has been generated is issued. As a result, an illegal act due to an abnormal game ball entering the starting area 56 can be prevented.

  After the advantageous state ending condition is set in the process of step S313 shown in FIG. 31, in response to the advantageous state flag being on, the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal game is stopped and the step shown in FIG. The variable display count value is updated every time the process of S379 is executed, and when the variable display count value matches the advantageous state end determination value in step S380, the advantageous state flag is cleared by the process of step S381. Then, the special gaming state is terminated and the normal gaming state is entered. As a result, in a special game state in which a game ball is likely to enter the start area 56, the game ball becomes the specific area even though the game ball can enter the start area 56 based on the normal display result. The game ball is not allowed to enter the start area 56 until the opening 82 provided in the first special variable winning ball device 66 is opened at a timing at which it is likely to enter the specific advance entrance 89 or the second specific advance entrance 91. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an act that can generate a jackpot with an unreasonably high probability. Here, as a timing at which the game ball easily enters the specific area in the special game state, for example, the rotating body 79 is always rotated by the motor 127, and the rotating body 79 rotates every time the rotating body 79 reaches a predetermined switching rotational speed. When the rotational speed of the body 79 is switched between a relatively slow speed and a relatively fast speed, there are timings at which the rotational speed of the rotational body 79 becomes relatively slow. That is, compared to when the rotational speed of the rotating body 79 is relatively slow, it becomes easier to aim at the timing of launching the game ball that enters the second specific entrance 91, regardless of the rotational speed of the rotating body 79. Compared to the case of launching a game ball, it is possible to generate a big hit with an unreasonably high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 2B, the variable guide member 61a included in the normal variable winning ball device 61 provided in the passage through which the game ball can enter in the game area 41 is the front side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game ball can enter the start area 56 by advancing to, while the game ball moves into the start area 56 by retreating to the back side in the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. It is configured to be inaccessible. As a result, the normal variable winning ball device 61 can be used as a normal passage until the variable induction member 61a is advanced by driving the normal electric accessory solenoid 59 according to the setting of the normal electric operation pattern. The game effect can be improved by increasing the degree of design freedom.

  The distribution member 83 as a movable member different from the rotating body 79 can be changed between the first distribution state and the second distribution state by driving the distribution solenoid 108. In this way, when the movable member is operated using the solenoid, the movable member is moved in a very short time compared to the case where it is operated using the motor, for example, by executing the process of step S264 shown in FIG. It can be stopped after returning to the initial position, and the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the first distribution operation pattern in the above embodiment, the distribution member 83 is continuously brought into the first distribution state by driving the distribution solenoid 108, and the second distribution in the above embodiment is performed. In the operation pattern, it has been described that the distribution member 83 is continuously set to the second distribution state by stopping the driving of the distribution solenoid 108. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern for operating the distribution member 83 in an operation mode in which a game ball easily enters a specific area is defined as a first distribution operation pattern, which is a game compared to the first distribution operation pattern. Any pattern may be used as long as the second movement pattern is a pattern in which the sorting member 83 is operated in an operation mode in which the ball does not easily enter the specific area.

  As an example, in the first distribution operation pattern, driving of the distribution solenoid 108 is stopped and the distribution member 83 is set to the first distribution state in a predetermined first distribution period such as 0.2 seconds. Thus, after the game balls are distributed to the first area 85, the distribution solenoid 108 is driven in the second distribution state by driving the distribution solenoid 108 in a predetermined second distribution period such as 0.2 seconds. Thus, the driving operation for distributing the game balls to the second region 88 is repeatedly performed until the advantageous distribution period elapses. On the other hand, in the second distribution operation pattern, the distribution solenoid 83 is stopped in the first distribution state by stopping driving of the distribution solenoid 108 in a predetermined third distribution period such as 0.5 seconds. Thus, after the game balls are distributed to the first area 85, the distribution solenoid 108 is driven in the fourth distribution period that is the same as the second distribution period, for example, 0.2 seconds, and the distribution member The driving operation for distributing the game balls to the second area 88 by setting 83 to the second distribution state may be repeated until the small hit game state is completed. In this case, in the first distribution operation pattern, the period of the first distribution state is shorter than that in the second distribution operation pattern (first distribution period <third distribution period). The probability that a game ball that has entered the inside of the first special variable winning ball device 66 is distributed to the second area 88 is increased. The game balls distributed to the second area 88 are higher in probability than the game balls distributed to the first area 85 (the first specific entrance 89 in the first area 85 and the second in the second area 88). Since the player enters the specific entrance 91), the first distribution motion pattern is easier to enter the specific area than the second distribution operation pattern.

  In the above embodiment, in response to the opening portion 82 being changed from the closed state to the open state by the starting operation in the small hit gaming state, the distribution is performed until a predetermined time such as the advantageous distribution time or the advantageous rotation time elapses. When a predetermined time elapses after the solenoid 108 and the motor 127 are driven in a first operation pattern such as the first distribution operation pattern and the first rotation pattern to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific area, The first operation pattern has been described as a thing that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area by switching to the second operation pattern such as the second distribution operation pattern or the second rotation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the small hit game state, after driving the sorting solenoid 108 and the motor 127 in the second operation pattern in which the game ball does not easily enter the specific area until a predetermined time has elapsed. When a predetermined time has elapsed, the sorting solenoid 108 and the motor 127 may be driven with a first operation pattern in which a game ball easily enters a specific area. As an example, in response to the opening portion 82 being changed from the closed state to the opened state by the start operation in the small hit gaming state, the disadvantageous distribution time or disadvantage that has the same length as the advantageous distribution time or the advantageous rotation time. Until the predetermined time such as the rotation time elapses, the distribution solenoid 108 and the motor 127 are driven in the second operation pattern such as the second distribution operation pattern and the second rotation pattern, and then the predetermined time is reached. When the time has elapsed, the second operation pattern may be switched to the first operation pattern such as the first distribution operation pattern or the first rotation pattern.

  In the above embodiment, the motor 127 and the rotating body 79 are rotated in the first rotation pattern according to whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “second small hit”. It explained as what makes the length of advantageous rotation time differ. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “second small hit”, the distribution solenoid 108 and the distribution member 83 are changed. Either or both of the length of the advantageous distribution time for operating in the first distribution operation pattern and the length of the advantageous rotation time for rotating the motor 127 and the rotating body 79 in the first rotation pattern. May be different. Such advantageous allocation time and advantageous rotation time can be set in advance according to the allocation drive determination value, allocation stop determination value, motor drive start determination value, and motor drive switching determination value in the small hit control pattern. Good.

  In the above embodiment, in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 25A, depending on whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “fourth small hit”, FIG. B) The start interval time as shown in FIG. 5B is determined, and the waiting time until the opening 82 is opened by the starting operation after the special figure variation time in the special figure game or the confirmed special symbol is displayed is the start time. The description has been made assuming that it is predetermined so as to match the interval time. However, the operation waiting time from when the start port switch 60 detects the game ball to when the opening 82 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the start operation is determined by driving the motor 127 to move the rotating body 79 from an arbitrary rotation position. Set the special figure variation time in the special figure game, the waiting time until the opening 82 is opened by the starting operation after the special special symbol is displayed so that it can be longer than the time required to return to the initial position If so, it is not necessary to make a determination of the start interval time separately from these times. For example, even if the shortest of the special figure variation times in the special figure game is made longer than the maximum required time (for example, “5.0 seconds”) for the rotating body 79 to return from the arbitrary rotational position to the initial position. Good.

  Alternatively, after the small hit gaming state is finished, the special symbol in the special game may be changed after waiting until the rotating body 79 returns to the initial position. In this case, for example, every time the special symbol process is executed in step S16 shown in FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in an on state. For example, a predetermined flag such as a start winning flag is set to an on state. Then, in the process of step S201 shown in FIG. 25A, it is determined whether or not the start winning flag is on. If it is off, the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the start winning flag is ON, the return control for returning the rotating body 79 to the initial position is performed, for example, by determining whether or not the motor return control timer value is “0”. It is determined whether or not At this time, if the motor return control timer value is other than “0”, it is determined that the return control is being performed, and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Should not be started. On the other hand, when the motor return control timer value is “0”, after the start winning flag is cleared and turned off, the process may proceed to step S202 shown in FIG. Further, in this case, instead of the process of step S202, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is extracted when the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is turned on. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 may be stored in the random number value buffer or the like. When it is determined that the motor return control timer value is “0”, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 stored in the random value buffer or the like may be read.

  Alternatively, if the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, for example, the variable display result is “small hit” over a time longer than the time required for the rotating body 79 to return to the initial position. A predetermined interval period, such as a notification operation period for notifying that, may be provided, and the opening 82 may be opened by the start operation after the interval period has elapsed.

  In the above embodiment, as a round game executed in the big hit game state, the opening 48 as the second big prize opening provided in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is set to the opening / closing plate 49 regardless of the number of executions. As described above, the operation of changing the closed state to the closed state is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first special variable winning ball apparatus is a round game that is executed first (first time) in the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit”. An operation may be performed in which the opening 82 as the first big prize opening provided at 66 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the open / close piece 81 and then is closed.

  As a specific example, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the special figure display result becomes “first big hit” and the special figure display result becomes “second big hit”. The table data of the special figure display result determination table 200 shown in FIG. 8 is configured so as to be included. Here, when the special figure display result is “first big hit”, the same control as in the case where the special figure display result is “big hit” in the above embodiment is performed. On the other hand, the following setting and control are performed corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “second big hit”.

  That is, in the round control pattern table 240C shown in FIG. 13C, the round control pattern RP1-2 as shown in FIG. 46 is used as the round control pattern used when the special figure display result is “second big hit”. Is stored. In the round control pattern RP1-2, as the control pattern when the round number count value is “1”, for example, as in the small hit control pattern as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to include pattern data including determination values and control data for controlling the movable member. In addition, as a setting of the special figure fluctuation pattern and the special figure fluctuation time, a setting corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “second big hit” is prepared. Then, the special figure change start command for which transmission setting is performed in the process of step S207 shown in FIG. 25 is performed as an effect control command indicating whether the special figure display result is “first big hit” or “second big hit” It is good. Alternatively, an effect control command indicating whether the special figure display result is “first big hit” or “second big hit” as an effect control command separate from the special figure change start command is produced from the main board 120. You may make it transmit with respect to the board | substrate 90. FIG. Further, even with the jackpot start command for which transmission setting is performed in the process of step S223 shown in FIG. 26, the special figure display result may indicate “first jackpot” or “second jackpot”. .

  Also, in the process of step S222 shown in FIG. 26, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “first big hit” or “second big hit”. If it is “first big hit”, round control is performed. While the pattern RP1-1 is set, the round control pattern RP1-2 is set in the case of “second big hit”. Then, in the big hit opening process of step S115 shown in FIG. 24, is the opening 82 as the first big winning opening opened by referring to the round control pattern based on the round count value? It is determined whether or not the opening 48 is a second big prize opening. At this time, if it is determined that the first big prize opening is to be opened, the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 starts to be driven, and the first special prize winning ball device 66 is provided with the first big prize winning hole. The drive control which makes the opening part 82 a closed state is performed after making the opening part 82 into the open state from the closed state by the opening-and-closing plate 81. In addition, when the first big prize opening is opened as a round game, the drive control of the solenoids 105, 108, 118 and the motor 127 may be performed according to the setting of the round control pattern RP1-2, for example. . Furthermore, the same process as the process at the time of entering the first grand prize opening executed in step S252 shown in FIG. 27 may be executed.

  In the big hit opening process of step S115, the elapsed time from the opening 82 being in the open state is measured, and it is determined whether or not the elapsed time has reached the opening end time corresponding to the big winning opening opening end determination value. Done. In the big hit opening process, it is also determined whether or not the first big prize opening count value has reached the opening end determination value. When the elapsed time reaches the opening end time, or when the first big prize opening count value reaches the opening completion judgment value, the opening 82 as the first big winning opening is closed by the opening / closing piece 81. Set for. At this time, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area by determining whether one of the first specific ball detection flag and the second specific ball detection flag is on. May be. Then, different presentation control commands may be transmitted from the main board 120 to the presentation control board 90 depending on whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area. Alternatively, the same effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area. On the other hand, for example, when a detection signal from the first specific ball detector 121a or the second specific ball detector 121b is input to the effect control board 90, a game ball enters the specific area on the effect control board 90 side. It may be possible to determine whether or not, and different effects may be executed according to the determination result. Also, for example, when it is determined in step S508 shown in FIG. 29 that the detection signal from the first specific sphere detector 121a is on, or in step S510, from the second specific sphere detector 121b. An effect control command indicating that a game ball has entered a specific area may be transmitted from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 when it is determined that the detection signal is on.

  On the side of the effect control board 90, for example, when the special figure display result shown in the special figure change start command or the big hit start command is “second big hit”, the special symbol change in the special figure game ends and the big hit At the time when the control to the gaming state is started, an effect that does not notify that the control to the big hit gaming state is started is executed. As an example, when the special figure display result is “first jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 47A in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b when the control to the jackpot gaming state is started. An effect image for informing that a big jackpot has occurred is displayed. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “second jackpot”, the effect image as shown in FIG. 47 (A) should be displayed when the control to the jackpot gaming state is started. If, for example, it is determined that the first (first) round game in the big hit gaming state is being executed in the big hit effect processing of step S169 shown in FIG. 37, the effect image as shown in FIG. 47 (B) Is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. The effect image shown in FIG. 47 (B) may be the same effect image as that displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b in the small hitting medium effect process in step S168 shown in FIG. In addition, various production operation modes such as sound output modes from the speakers 12a and 12b, lighting operation modes in various game effect LED / lamps 13, 14a to 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a and 17b, and various decoration LED / lamps 32 are also provided. The same mode as in the small hit gaming state may be used. In this way, when the special figure display result is “second big hit”, the first aspect is the same effect as the case where the special figure display result is “first small hit” to “fourth big hit”. An effect corresponding to a change from the closed state to the open state of the opening 82 as the first grand prize opening provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is executed.

  After that, when the first round game ends in the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “second big hit”, for example, in the predetermined period before the second round game starts Different effects are executed depending on whether or not a game ball has entered the area. As an example, when a game ball enters a specific area, an image as shown in FIG. 48 (A) is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, and then an image as shown in FIG. 48 (B). Execute the V winning success presentation. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area, an image as shown in FIG. 48C is displayed on the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b and then shown in FIG. The V winning failure effect for displaying the image as shown is executed.

  After the first round game is finished in the big hit game state based on the result of the special figure display being “second big hit”, the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entry which becomes a specific area during the round game is completed. Regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered any of the entrances 91, the next round game may be entered. Thus, even in the big hit gaming state based on the result that the special figure display result is “second big hit”, the opening 48 as the first big prize opening provided in the first special variable winning ball device 66 is the same as in the starting operation. While the game changes to an open state, even if a game ball does not enter a specific area, the big hit game state can be continued and the next round game can be performed, which increases the unexpectedness of the game and improves the game interest Can be made. In this case, after the effect image as shown in FIG. 47 (B) is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, it is shown in FIG. 48 (C) in a predetermined period before the second round game is started. ) And (D) are executed, and the impression that a big hit has occurred after the start operation in the small hit gaming state even though the game ball does not enter the specific area is executed. After the opening 82 as the first big prize opening has changed from the open state to the closed state together with a sense of expectation for the game ball to enter the specific area. The feeling of expectation for being controlled to the big hit gaming state can be maintained, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When the first round game ends in the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “second big hit”, the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance during the round game. If a game ball does not enter any of 91, the big hit gaming state may be terminated. Also, when the drive control of the motor 127 is performed in the first round in the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “second big hit”, in the big hit end processing of step S117, FIG. Similar to the processing of steps S265 and S266 shown, the motor rotation amount may be specified, and the motor return control timer and the motor rotation direction pattern may be set.

  In the above embodiment, even if the special figure display result is any one of “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”, in the small hit gaming state, the solenoid 105 for the opening / closing piece is extended for “2.0 seconds”. The driving operation to drive and open the opening 82 is repeated twice over a period of 4.0 seconds that stops the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 from driving and the opening 82 is closed. Explained as a thing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and becomes the first big winning opening in the small hit gaming state depending on whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. The number of times that the opening 82 is changed from the closed state to the opened state (starting opening number) and the time that the opening 82 is continuously opened (opening time) may be varied. For example, the small hit control pattern KP1 for the first small hit and the small hit control pattern for the third small hit used when the special figure display result is “first small hit” or “third small hit”. In KP3, the start opening number may be set to “1” and the opening time may be set to “5.0 seconds”. In contrast, the small hit control pattern KP2 for the second small hit and the small for the fourth small hit used when the special figure display result is “second small hit” or “fourth small hit”. In the hit control pattern KP4, the start opening number may be set to “2” and the opening time may be set to “10.0 seconds”. Alternatively, the opening time is set to “3.0 seconds” in the small hit control pattern KP1 and the small hit control pattern KP3, while the opening time is set to “5.0 seconds” in the small hit control pattern KP2 and the small hit control pattern KP4. As in the case of setting “”, the opening 82 as the first big prize opening may be in an open state for a longer time than in the above embodiment.

  The variable guiding member 61a provided in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 61 is not limited to the structure shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, and the game ball can easily enter the starting area 56. What is necessary is just to be able to switch the state which cannot enter easily, for example, the thing of a structure as shown to FIG. 49 (A) and (B) may be sufficient. With such a configuration, for example, when the variable guiding member 61a is retracted as shown in FIG. 49A, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the start area 56, and the start area The configuration of the back surface of the game board 40 can be simplified by shortening the length of the guidance route 56.

  In the above embodiment, in the winning error determination process shown in FIG. 22, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the detection signal from the first count switch 106 is on, or in the process of step S53, the first specific ball. When it is determined that the detection signal from the detector 121a is on, or when it is determined in the process of step S54 that the detection signal from the second specific sphere detector 121b is on, step S55 or It has been described that the process of step S56 is executed and the setting for prohibiting the payout of prize balls and the notification that an abnormality has occurred are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the processes of steps S52 to S54, when a plurality of game balls are detected by the respective switches 106 and detectors 121a and 121b, the processes of steps S55 and S56 are performed. May be executed. Also in the process of step S58, when a plurality of game balls are detected by the second count switch 52, the process may proceed to steps S59 and S60. Furthermore, also in the process of step S62, when a plurality of game balls are detected by the start port switch 60, the process of step S63 or step S64 may be executed. As a result, when a game ball accidentally enters each winning opening or entrance, an error determination is not made that an abnormal winning ball has been detected, but a large number of gaming balls enter each winning entrance or entrance. Therefore, it is possible to surely prevent an illegal act of unjustly trying to win a prize ball.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, any of the game balls that have entered the first specific entrance 89, the first normal winning openings 94a and 94b, the second specific entrance 91, and the second normal winning opening 94c are all. In the above description, it is assumed that after being guided by the discharge guiding area 123 and detected by the discharge ball detector 122, it is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has entered the first specific advance entrance 89 or the second specific advance entrance 91 is not detected by the discharge ball detector 122, but the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66. May be discharged to the outside.

  In this case, for example, separately from the discharge guiding area 123, the game ball detected by the first specific ball detector 121 a entering the first specific entrance 89 is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66. And a discharge guiding area for entering the second specific entrance 91 and discharging the game ball detected by the second specific ball detector 121b to the outside of the first special variable winning ball device 66. Configure as follows. For example, after executing the process of step S509 shown in FIG. 29 or after executing the process of step S511, the first specific sphere detector 121a or the second In response to the specific ball detector 121b detecting a game ball, the remaining ball count value may be updated. At this time, the first specific ball detector 121a that detects the game ball that has entered the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific ball detector 121b that detects the game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 91 are specified. While detecting the game ball which entered the area, the game ball discharged from the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected.

  In the above embodiment, the first grand prize port counter and the second grand prize port counter are provided separately, and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 106 is counted by the first grand prize port counter, The description has been made assuming that the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 52 is counted by the second grand prize winning counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 106 and the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 52 are counted by a common big prize counter. You may do it. Thereby, the capacity of the stored data in the game control microcomputer 99 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the number of game balls remaining in the first special variable winning ball device 66 is counted by the remaining ball number counter. In place of the remaining ball counter, a discharge ball counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the discharge ball detector 122 is provided, and the difference from the number of game balls that have entered the first grand prize opening is “0”. Whether or not there is a game ball remaining in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 may be determined based on whether or not the game ball remains. In this case, for example, the process of step S503 shown in FIG. 29 is not executed, and instead of the process of step S513, when the detection signal from the discharge ball detector 122 is on in step S512, the discharge ball counter 1 is added to the discharge ball count value which is the count value. And it replaces with the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 28, and it is determined whether the difference of a 1st big winning opening count value and a discharge ball count value became "0". At this time, if the difference is “0”, the process proceeds to step S263, and if the difference is other than “0”, the process proceeds to step S268. Then, when the process of step S268 shown in FIG. 28 is executed, the discharged ball counter may be initialized to clear the discharged ball count value.

  In the small hit gaming state, the remaining ball count value may be updated, but the first big prize opening count value may not be updated. For example, in the process at the time of entering the first grand prize opening executed in step S252 shown in FIG. 27, the process of step S502 shown in FIG. 29 is not executed, and the process of step S268 shown in FIG. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load executed by the CPU 112 of the game control microcomputer 99 in the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the opening portion 82 provided in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is opened by the opening / closing piece 81 as a round game executed in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning mouth count While the value is updated, the remaining ball count value may not be updated. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load of processing executed by the CPU 112 of the game control microcomputer 99 as compared with the case where the remaining ball count value is updated even in the big hit gaming state.

  Alternatively, a common game ball counter may be provided in place of the first grand prize port counter, the second big prize port counter, and the remaining ball number counter. In this case, for example, in the first big winning opening entry process executed in step S252 shown in FIG. 27 in the small hit gaming state, instead of the processes in steps S502 and S503 shown in FIG. A process of adding 1 to the game ball count value which is the count value at is executed. Also, instead of the process of step S513 shown in FIG. 29, a process of subtracting 1 from the count value in the game ball counter is executed. Then, instead of the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 28, a process of determining whether or not the game ball count value is “0” is executed. If the game ball count value is “0”, the process of step S263 is performed. If it is other than “0”, the process may proceed to step S268. In addition, in the big hit release process of step S115 shown in FIG. 24, each time the detection signal from the first count switch 106 or the second count switch 52 is turned on, the game ball count value is incremented by one. What is necessary is just to count the number of winning balls in the 1st grand prize opening or the 2nd big prize opening. In this way, instead of the three counters such as the first grand prize winning counter, the second big winning prize counter, and the remaining ball counter, one common counter is used, so that the stored data in the game control microcomputer 99 can be stored. The capacity can be reduced, and the processing load executed by the CPU 112 of the game control microcomputer 99 in the small hit game state or the big hit game state can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, after the motor return control timer initial value is set in the process of step S266 shown in FIG. 28, the value of the motor return control timer is “0” in the process of step S153 shown in FIG. It has been described that the motor 127 is driven to return the rotating body 79 to the initial position by executing the process of step S154 until it is determined that there is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motor 127 is driven to bring the rotating body 79 to the initial position until it can be detected from the amount of rotation of the motor 127 and the rotating body 79 that the rotating body 79 has returned to the initial position. You may make it return. In this case, the motor rotation direction pattern is set based on the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 specified in the process of step S265 shown in FIG. Set the flag to the on state. In the motor initial position return control process executed in step S24 shown in FIG. 21, the following process is executed instead of the process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  That is, when the motor initial position return control process is started, the CPU 112 first determines whether or not the initial position return flag is on. At this time, if the initial position return in-progress flag is off, the motor initial position return control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the initial position returning flag is ON, the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 is specified, for example, in the same manner as the process of step S265 shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the rotating body 79 has returned to the initial position from the specified rotation amount. Or, unlike the detailed amount of rotation of the rotating body 79, whether or not the rotating body 79 has returned to the initial position based on a detection signal from a detector that can only detect that the rotating body 79 is in the initial position. You may make it perform determination. If the rotor 79 has not returned to the initial position in this determination process, the motor 127 is driven according to the set motor rotation direction pattern, and then the motor initial position return control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotating body 79 has returned to the initial position, the setting for stopping the driving of the motor 127 is performed and the initial position returning flag is cleared, and then the motor initial position return control process is performed. Just finish. Thus, the driving of the motor 127 can be stopped after the rotating body 79 is accurately returned to the initial position. Here, after the process of step S266 shown in FIG. 28 is executed, the elapsed time in the period in which it is repeatedly determined that the initial position return flag is on in the motor initial position return control process is measured. When a predetermined time has been reached, the occurrence of an error may be notified or the progress of the game may be stopped because the rotating body 79 cannot be returned to the initial position. Thereby, for example, an act of stopping the rotation operation of the rotating body 79 by an external force and illegally entering the game ball into the second specific entrance 91 serving as the specific area can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, by setting the motor rotation direction pattern corresponding to the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 in the process of step S266 shown in FIG. It has been described that it can be rotated in a direction in which it can be quickly returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the process in step S266, only the motor return control timer value corresponding to the rotation amount of the rotating body 79 is set. In the process in step S154 shown in FIG. According to the motor rotation direction pattern, the drive setting of the motor 127 may be performed such that the rotating body 79 is rotated only in either the forward direction or the reverse direction. Alternatively, in the process of step S266, the motor return is performed based on the rotation amount of the rotary body 79 specified in the process of step S265 and the rotation direction (forward direction or reverse direction) of the rotary body 79 at the end of the small hit gaming state. The control timer value is set, and in the process of step S154 shown in FIG. 35, the drive setting of the motor 127 may be performed so that the rotating body 79 is rotated in the rotation direction at the end of the small hit gaming state. . Alternatively, instead of the processing of steps S265 and S266 shown in FIG. 28, for example, processing for setting an initial position return flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162 to an ON state is performed. In the motor initial position return control processing, Based on a detection signal from a detector that can only detect that the rotator 79 is in the initial position, when the initial position return flag is on, the motor 127 is moved in a certain direction until the rotator 79 returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the drive setting for continuously rotating may be performed. Thereby, the drive setting in the motor 127 for returning the rotating body 79 to the initial position is simplified, and the control burden for returning the rotating body 79 to the initial position can be reduced. In addition, if a detector capable of detecting only that the rotator 79 is in the initial position is used, the detector configuration is simpler than when the detailed rotation amount of the rotator 79 is specified. Thus, the processing load on the CPU 112 can be reduced.

  In the embodiment described above, the special symbol display device 44a performs a special symbol game by changing a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numerals indicating "00" to "99", symbols indicating "-", and the like. In the above description, one of the big hit symbol indicating “77” and the small hit symbol indicating “22”, “44”, “66”, and “88” is derived and displayed as a display result. On the other hand, the special symbol display device 44a is configured by using, for example, three LEDs of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the special symbols are changed by lighting each LED in a predetermined order. A special game may be played. For example, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, all “left”, “middle”, and “right” LEDs are turned on, and when the special figure display result is “first big hit”. Turn on the “Left” and “Middle” LEDs. If the special figure display result is “second small hit”, turn on the “Left” and “Right” LEDs. If the special figure display result is “No. In the case of “3 small hits”, the “middle” and “right” LEDs are turned on. In the case where the special figure display result is “4th small hits”, only the “middle” LEDs are turned on. The result may be derived. In other words, the special figure display result that is the variable display result of the first identification information is not limited to the type of the fixed special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special figure game, and is turned on in a lighting mechanism such as a plurality of LEDs and lamps. Any information configured to be identifiable, such as a combination of an object and an object to be turned off, may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the normal symbol display device 63 performs the general symbol game by changing the normal symbols by alternately lighting “O” and “X” in the upper and lower two locations, and “O” and “X”. It has been described that the display result is derived by lighting any of the above. On the other hand, the normal symbol display device 63 is constituted by using, for example, three LEDs “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the normal symbols are changed by lighting each LED in a predetermined order. It is also possible to play a regular game. Then, for example, when the general map display result is “normal map loss”, the “left” and “middle” LEDs are turned on, and when the general map display result is “per 1st general map”, “left”. And turn on the “right” LED, and if the usual map display result is “per second map”, turn on the “middle” and “right” LEDs to derive the display result. Also good. In other words, the universal figure display result, which is the variable display result of the second identification information, is not limited to the type of the fixed normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in the universal figure game, but is lit in a lighting mechanism such as a plurality of LEDs and lamps. Any information configured to be identifiable, such as a combination of an object and an object to be turned off, may be used.

  In the above embodiment, when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value other than “0” in the normal symbol normal processing in step S140 shown in FIG. 32, the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game is not started. It was described as being controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a period from when the change of the special symbol is started until the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed, or a period in which the small hit game state or the big hit game state is controlled. Alternatively, the change of the normal symbol in the normal game may be started. In this case, with respect to various effects by displaying the effect image in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, special effects when changing special figures corresponding to changes in special symbols, and effects in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state are decorated. What is necessary is just to preferentially perform rather than the production | presentation corresponding to the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol like the variable display of a symbol.

  As an example, among the processes in steps S160 to S170 illustrated in FIG. 36, the processes in steps S165 to S170 are configured as separate process processes different from the process processes including the processes in steps S160 to S164. The processes in steps S160 to S164 are executed by selecting any process corresponding to the value of the decorative symbol process flag, for example, while the processes in steps S165 to S170 are different effects from the decorative symbol process flag. Corresponding to the value of the control process flag, there may be a case where any process is selected and executed, and a case where any process is not selected. In the effect processing during normal power operation in step S164, when it is determined that the special figure change start command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is set in the special figure change effect setting process in step S165. Update to the corresponding value. In the decorative symbol variable display process in step S162 and the ordinary power operation effect process in step S164, is any of the processes in steps S165 to S170 selected and executed based on the value of the effect control process flag, for example? If it is determined to be executed and executed, various settings for controlling the rendering operation are not performed, and the decorative symbol variable display processing and the ordinary power operation rendering processing are terminated.

  At this time, the display data for displaying the effect image corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol such as the effect image for variably displaying the decorative symbol in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, or the game ball in the start area 56 is displayed. The display data for displaying the effect image corresponding to the possibility of entering in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b is executed when any of the processes in steps S165 to S170 is selected (ie, The display control unit 171 uses the VDP to develop the VRAM in a predetermined area of the VRAM even when the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol or the effect in the small hit game state or the big hit game state is being executed. You may make it memorize | store. However, during the period in which any of the processes of steps S165 to S170 is selected and executed, the display data developed in the VRAM corresponding to the decorative symbol variable display process and the ordinary operation effect process is LCD-driven. It is not read out by a circuit or the like and supplied to the effect display device 44b. In addition, in the decorative symbol variable display processing or the ordinary power operation effect processing, when it is detected that the big hit gaming state is not transitioned after the small hit gaming state ends or the big hit gaming state is ended, For example, based on a predetermined effect control pattern stored in advance in the effect control pattern table 300, for example, an effect operation corresponding to a normal symbol variation or an effect operation corresponding to the fact that a game ball can enter the start area 56 Settings for switching may be performed.

  For example, if the decorative symbol variable display processing in step S162 is executed based on the reception of the universal symbol change start command indicating that the normal symbol display result is “per 1st universal symbol”, the normal symbol variation is performed. The timing for detecting that the jackpot gaming state has not been reached or the jackpot gaming state has ended after the end of the small hit gaming state, such as the elapsed time from the start, is based on the timing at which the decorative display variable display mode reaches reach. It is determined whether or not it is before. At this time, if it is before the reach timing, for example, the effect image in the small hit game state or the big hit game state is faded out in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, and then, for example, the display control unit 171 By using the display data and the like developed and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM, the effect image during the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a fade-in manner or the like, thereby switching to the effect operation corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol. On the other hand, if it is after the timing of reaching, for example, after the display of the effect image in the small hit game state or the big hit game state in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b, the display area 80 is flashed. For example, using display data developed and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM by the display control unit 171, for example, during the variable display of decorative symbols Is switched to a presentation operation corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol. By switching the effect operation in this way, even if the effect operation corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is performed in the middle, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Regardless of whether or not the detection timing such as the end of the big hit gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state or the end of the big hit gaming state is before the reach timing May be switched suddenly.

  In this way, even if the normal symbols change in the normal game, the special symbols change in the special game will start after the previous special game, the small hit game state, the big hit game state, etc. are completed. What should I do? In this case, for example, every time the special symbol process is executed in step S16 shown in FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in an on state. For example, a predetermined flag such as a start winning flag is set to an on state. Then, in the process of step S201 shown in FIG. 25A, it is determined whether or not the start winning flag is on. If it is off, the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, if the start winning flag is on, the start winning flag may be cleared and then the process may proceed to step S202. In addition, instead of the processing in step S202, when the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is turned on, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is extracted, and a predetermined randomness is extracted. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 may be stored in a numerical buffer or the like. When it is determined that the start winning flag is on, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 stored in the random value buffer or the like may be read.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the period during which the game ball can be guided to the start area 56 does not change when the base map display result is “per first base map”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal gaming state or a special gaming state, the usual figure display result is “per first figure”. In this case, the period during which the game ball can be guided to the start area 56 may be changed. As a specific example, in the ordinary electric operation pattern FA1-1, the winning time is set to “5 seconds”, while in the ordinary electric operation pattern FA2-1, the possible winning time is set to “15 seconds”. You can do it.

  In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the special gaming state, regardless of whether the base map display result is “per 1st base map” or “per 2nd base map”, It has been described that the game ball can enter the start area 56 for 5 seconds in response to the variable display result in the normal game being “per normal”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the ordinary electric operation pattern FA2-1, the winning time is set to “5 seconds”, while in the ordinary electric operation pattern FA2-2, the possible winning time is “4 seconds”. ”, Etc., even in the special game state, the start area 56 is displayed depending on whether the base map display result is“ per 1st base map ”or“ per 2nd base map ”. You may make it vary the time when a game ball can enter.

  In the above embodiment, the processing from step S202 onward is executed in response to the determination in step S201 shown in FIG. 25 that the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in the ON state, and the special game is executed. It has been described that the hold information regarding is not stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold information related to the special game may be configured to be stored. In this case, for example, a special figure storage unit is provided in the game control data holding area 250. This special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls entered the start area 56, and is extracted by the CPU 112 based on the count value from the random number generation circuit 60a or the random counter based on the entry of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). As an example, in the special symbol process in step S16 shown in FIG. 21, whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in the on state before the processes in steps S110 to S117 shown in FIG. 24 are executed. Judgment is made. At this time, if the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in an OFF state, the process proceeds to steps S110 to S117. On the other hand, if the detection signal from the start port switch 60 is in the ON state, is the special figure reservation storage number that is the number of reserved data stored in the special figure reservation storage unit being the upper limit value? Determine whether or not. If the special figure holding storage number is the upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated, and the process proceeds to steps S110 to S117. On the other hand, when the special figure hold storage number is less than the upper limit value, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is extracted and set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit. At this time, for example, the special figure reserved memory number count value which is a count value in the special figure reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 164 may be updated by one. Also, a special symbol start memory display area provided in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b is set for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to be a special figure reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 90. For example, an effect image that can specify the number of special figure hold memories may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure display result determination table 200 as shown in FIG. 8 is referred to in step S203 based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination acquired in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. Thus, it has been described that the special figure display result can be determined as either “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result in the special figure game is set to “small hit” by using a random number for determining the small hit type different from the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. In this case, it may be determined whether the special figure display result is “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”. As an example, in the process of step S203, based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, it is determined whether the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit” or “small hit”. At this time, when it is determined that “small hit” is made, a special figure is obtained by referring to a small hit type determination table stored in advance in the ROM 100 or the like based on a random number for determining the small hit type. What is necessary is just to determine whether the display result is “first small hit” to “fourth small hit”.

  Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, and if it is determined not to be “big hit”, whether the variable display result is “small hit” It may be determined whether or not “special drawing loss” is set. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, and if it is determined not to be “big hit”, for example, the random value for determining the small hit type is not used. Alternatively, the variable display result may be always “small hit” by setting the small hit flag to the on state. At this time, if it is determined not to be “big hit”, for example, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “first small hit” and not “first small hit”. When the determination is made, the special figure display result may be “second small hit”.

  In the above-described embodiment, based on the random number value MR2 for universal map display result determination read from the universal map storage unit 161 in the process of step S351 shown in FIG. By referring to the normal time normal map display result determination table 210A shown in FIG. 9B or the advantageous time normal map display result determination table 210B shown in FIG. It has been described that it is determined whether it is “per figure” or “ordinary figure loss”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result in the normal game is expressed as “per normal map” by using a random number value for determining the type of normal map different from the random value MR2 for determining the normal map display result. In such a case, it may be determined whether the display result of the general map is “per 1st general map” or “per 2nd general map”. As an example, in the process of step S356, it is determined whether the variable display result in the general game is “per normal map” or “normal map loss” based on the random value MR2 for determining the normal map display result. . At this time, if it is determined that “per standard map” is made, by referring to the per standard map type determination table stored in advance in the ROM 100 or the like based on the random number value for determining the per standard map type. Then, it is only necessary to determine whether the map display result is “per first map” or “per second map”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the normal map display result is “per 1st normal map”, and when it is determined not to be “per 1st normal map”, the normal map display result is “ It may be determined whether “per second map” or “missed from common map”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the map display result is “per 1st map”, and when it is determined not to be “per 1st map”, for example, for determining the type per map By setting the value of the normal map display result flag to “2” without using the random number value, the normal map display result may always be “per second general map”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, based on the random number value MR2 for the map display result determination read out from the map reservation storage unit 161 in the process of step S351 shown in FIG. ), The normal map display result determination table 210A shown in FIG. 9B or the advantageous normal map display result determination table 210B shown in FIG. 9B is referred to. It has been described that it can be determined that it is one of “two per map”. On the other hand, when the variable display result in the general game is set to “per general map” using a random number value for determining the type per general map, which is different from the random value MR2 for determining the general map display result, You may make it determine whether the figure display result shall be "per 1st general map" or "per 2nd general map". As an example, in the process of step S351, it is determined whether the variable display result in the general game is “per normal map” or “normal map loss” based on the random number MR2 for determining the normal map display result. . At this time, if it is determined that “per standard map” is made, by referring to the per standard map type determination table stored in advance in the ROM 100 or the like based on the random number value for determining the per standard map type. Then, it is only necessary to determine whether the map display result is “per first map” or “per second map”.

  In the above embodiment, after the special game state is entered, the special game state is ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the usual game is executed without being controlled to the big hit game state. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the special game state is entered, the special game state is terminated when a predetermined number of special figure games are executed without being controlled to the big hit game state. It may be. In this case, for example, the processes in steps S378 to S381 shown in FIG. 34 may be executed after one of the processes in steps S232 and S233 shown in FIG. 26 is executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the process of step S313 shown in FIG. 31, regardless of whether the gaming state before the big hit gaming state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state, for example, “10” is set in advance. It was explained that the number of times of special map changes was set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state before the big hit gaming state is the special gaming state, a value different from that in the normal gaming state (for example, “20”), You may make it set as a special time common figure fluctuation frequency. At this time, if the special game state is set to a larger value as the number of times of special figure fluctuation than in the normal game state, it is possible to further increase the bonus game during the period in which the special game state is controlled. The probability of being controlled by the state (so-called “village rate”) increases, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, the opening / closing piece 81 of the first special variable winning ball device 66 changes the opening 82 serving as the first big winning opening from the closed state to the closed state and then changes again to the closed state. And the operation unit until the opening / closing plate 49 of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 47 is changed from the closed state to the closed state after the opening 48 serving as the second big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the closed state. It was described as one round game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the small hit game state, the opening operation 81 of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is also performed once to open the opening 82 that becomes the first big winning opening. It may be a round game. For example, if the small hit flag is on in step S227 shown in FIG. 26, the count initial value “1” is set in the round number counter, and then the first specific sphere detection flag in step S521 shown in FIG. 1 is added to the round count value corresponding to the fact that is turned on and the second specific sphere detection flag is turned on in step S526.

  In this way, since the round number count value is incremented by 1 in response to the start operation being performed in the small hit gaming state, it enters the first specific entrance 89 or the second specific entrance 91 serving as a specific area. The number of executions of the round game that can be continued in the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the played game ball is detected by the first specific ball detector 121a or the second specific ball detector 121b is the number of times determined as the maximum number of continuous times Less than once. For example, when the maximum number of continuations is determined to be “15”, the round count value is “15” in response to the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state reaching “14”. Therefore, when the 14th round game is finished, it is determined that the round number count value has reached the maximum round value, and the big round gaming state is finished without moving to the next round game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the remaining ball count value is determined to be “0” in the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 28, the specific winning determination process is executed in step S263, thereby It has been described that the game can be controlled to the big hit gaming state when a game ball enters one of the first specific entrance 89 and the second specific entrance 91 serving as a region. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to control to the big hit gaming state when a gaming ball that has entered the specific area in the small hit gaming state is detected. For example, instead of the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 28, if the game control process timer value does not match the storage release determination value in step S259 shown in FIG. Processing may be executed. In this case, for example, after the process of step S531 shown in FIG. 30 is executed, the processes of steps S264 to S268 shown in FIG. 28 may be executed.

  In the embodiment described above, the display control unit 171 is mounted on the effect control board 90, and the display operation and the like in the effect display device 44b are controlled under the control of the effect control board 90. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display control board on which a microcomputer is mounted is provided separately from the effect control board 90, and the display control unit 171 is mounted on the display control board. It may be configured. In this case, the display control board receives a control signal from the effect control board 90 by a microcomputer mounted separately from the effect control microcomputer 170, and outputs predetermined display control data corresponding to the control signal. Various controls may be performed by referring to them. In this case, the configuration of the audio frame lamp board 92 and the configuration of the lamp driver board 93 are included in the production control board 90, and audio is output from the speakers 12a and 12b under the direct control of the production control board 90. You may make it control operation | movement or lighting / extinguishing operation | movement of game effect LED13, 14a, 14c or game effect lamp 14b, 14d, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b. That is, a control signal is transmitted from the control board that can control the voice output operation and the lighting / extinguishing operation to the display control board that can control the display operation in the effect display device 44b, and is mounted on the display control board. The control signal may be received by a microcomputer and various controls may be performed in response to the control signal. In this case, in the microcomputer mounted on the control board capable of controlling the voice output operation, the on / off operation, etc., for example, a predetermined CPU performs the voice output operation based on the reception of the control command from the main board 120. In addition to executing a process for controlling the lighting / light-off operation and the like, a control signal may be transmitted to the display control board based on a control command from the main board 120.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various presentation operations including the presentation image display operation in the display area 80 of the presentation display device 44 b, etc. depart from the spirit of the invention Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the structural example of a normal variable winning ball apparatus. It is an expansion perspective view of the 1st special variable winning ball apparatus provided in the game board. It is a figure which expands and shows a 2nd area | region. It is an expansion perspective view of the 1st special variable winning ball apparatus provided in the game board. It is a block diagram which shows the connection of a main board | substrate, various control boards, and an electrical component. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random value used by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a general map display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a common figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a round number determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a normal electric operation pattern table, a small hits control pattern table, and a round control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the winning time corresponding to a general electric operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a small hits control pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motor forward direction rotation period corresponding to a small hit control pattern. It is a figure which shows the setting example of a round control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize error determination process. It is a figure which illustrates an abnormality alerting | reporting screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of small hit | release opening | release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of small hit | release opening | release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a 1st big winning opening entrance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a motor initial position return control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a general electric operation start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation | variation production setting process. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 1st small hit and the 2nd small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 1st small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 3rd small hit and the 4th small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of big hit. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control in the case of the 1st usual figure. It is a figure which shows the setting of the round control pattern used in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect image displayed in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation operation | movement in a modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the normal variable winning ball apparatus in a modification.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 41 ... Game area 44a ... Special symbol display apparatus 44b ... Production display apparatus 47 ... 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus 48, 82 ... Opening part 49 ... Opening / closing plate 52 ... 2nd count switch 56 ... Starting area 59 ... Solenoid for ordinary electric accessory 60 ... Start opening switch 61 ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 61a ... Variable induction member 63 ... Normal symbol display device 65 ... Second big winning port door solenoid 66 ... First special variable winning ball device 79 Rotating body 81 ... Opening and closing piece 83 ... Distributing member 89 ... First specific advance entrance 90 ... Production control board 91 ... Second specific advance entrance 105 ... Opening and closing piece solenoid 106 ... First count switch 108 ... Distributing solenoid 112 , 181 ... CPU
120 ... Main board 121a ... First specific sphere detector 121b ... Second specific sphere detector 122 ... Ejected ball detector 127 ... Motor

Claims (7)

A start detection means for detecting a game medium in a start area provided in the game area, and a first state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game medium by the start detection means and a disadvantage to the player A variable winning device that performs a starting operation that changes to the second state, and a specific detection means that detects a game medium that has entered a specific region among a plurality of regions provided in the variable winning device, A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to a player in response to the fact that the game medium that has entered the variable prize device that has entered the first state by operation is detected by the specific detection means. There,
First variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of first identification information each identifiable based on detection of a game medium by the start detection means;
First display result determining means for determining the variable display result of the first identification information as one of a plurality of display results including a specific display result and a predetermined display result;
Start control means for executing the start operation in response to the variable display result of the first identification information being the predetermined display result;
Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the first identification information becomes the specific display result, specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state regardless of whether or not a game medium has entered the specific area When,
As the specific action in the specific gaming state, an operation of changing the variable winning device different from the variable winning device from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state is a predetermined maximum continuation. Specific operation control means that can be continued up to
A second variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of second identification information, each of which can be identified, different from the first identification information, based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
A second display result determining means for determining the variable display result of the second identification information as one of a plurality of display results including a first display result and a second display result;
Corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means, with different presentation modes depending on which of the first display result and the second display result is determined by the second display result determination means Individual production execution means for executing the production,
In response to the variable display result of the second identification information being the first display result, the game medium can be guided to the starting area by a first guidance operation advantageous to the player, while the second Guidance that allows the game medium to be guided to the starting area by a second guidance operation that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first guidance action in response to the variable display result of the identification information being the second display result. Control means;
A movable member that is provided in the variable winning device and that operates in a predetermined operation mode from a predetermined initial position so that the game medium that has entered the variable winning device can be guided to the specific area;
Movable member control means for controlling the operation of the movable member in response to the starting operation;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game medium entering the variable winning device;
A discharge detecting means for detecting game media discharged from the variable winning device;
A medium presence / absence determining means for determining whether or not a game medium exists in the variable winning device based on the detection by the variable winning detection means and the detection by the discharge detecting means;
The movable member control means includes
In response to the start operation being started by the start control means, movable member operation starting means for starting the operation of the movable member;
After the operation of the movable member is started by the movable member operation start means, the movable member is moved to the predetermined position based on the fact that the medium existence determination means determines that no game medium exists in the variable winning device. Including an initial position return control means for executing control to stop after returning to the initial position of
The start control means includes start standby control means for starting the start operation after a predetermined operation standby time has elapsed since the game medium was detected by the start detection means.
The predetermined operation waiting time is longer than a time required for the movable member to return to the predetermined initial position by the initial position return control means ,
further,
As the first specific operation in the specific gaming state based on the variable display result of the first identification information being the specific display result, the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state. First-time specific operation control means for performing the operation to enter the second state after
The variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state in a common production mode based on the first display result determination means being determined as one of the specific display result and the predetermined display result. A common performance execution means for performing a performance corresponding to the change;
The second specific action after the first specific action in the specific gaming state is performed following the effect by the common effect execution means based on the fact that the specific display result is determined by the first display result determining means. A specific notification effect executing means for executing an effect of notifying that the player is in the specific gaming state in a period until
A gaming machine characterized by that. In response to the start operation being started by the start control means, the movable member control means sets the movable member as the predetermined operation mode by the movable member until a predetermined operation control time elapses. The game medium is operated with a first operation pattern that is easy to enter the specific area, and after the operation control time has elapsed, the movable member is operated with a second operation pattern that makes it difficult for the game medium to enter the specific area. Including operation switching control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1. In response to the start operation being started by the start control means, the movable member control means sets the movable member as the predetermined operation mode by the movable member until a predetermined operation control time elapses. The game medium is operated in a second operation pattern in which it is difficult for the game medium to enter the specific area, and the movable member is operated in the first operation pattern in which the game medium easily enters the specific area after the operation control time has elapsed. Including operation switching control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The movable member is a rotatable guide member,
The operation switching control unit rotates the guide member in a predetermined direction in the first operation pattern, and rotates the guide member in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in the second operation pattern.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that. The movable member control means includes control time determining means for determining the operation control time to be one of a plurality of predetermined types corresponding to the predetermined display result determined by the display result determining means.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, 3, or 4. In a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state, the second display result determining means determines either the first display result or the second display result. A period during which the game medium can be guided to the starting area by the guidance control means, a period from the start of variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means to the time when the variable display result is derived and displayed, and Of the probabilities determined by the second display result determining means as either the first display result or the second display result, at least one is compared with the normal game state different from the specific game state and the special game state. Special guidance control means to change
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that:   A variable winning detection means for detecting a game medium that has entered the variable winning device;
  The game medium is detected by the variable winning detection means in a determination period other than a period from when the variable winning device is changed to the first state to the second state until a predetermined effective detection time elapses. In accordance with whether or not it has been made, a variable prize abnormality determining means for determining the presence or absence of an abnormality,
  In response to determining that there is an abnormality by the variable prize abnormality determining means, an abnormality occurrence notifying means for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality,
  Which process is to be executed among a plurality of processes selectively executed in a predetermined order in order to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine including the variable display of the first identification information by the first variable display means. Process data storage means for storing the process data shown,
  The plurality of processes include a specific operation process that is executed according to the process data stored in the process data storage unit and causes the specific operation control unit to execute the specific operation,
  The variable prize abnormality determining means includes:
  Specific operation processing determination means for determining whether or not the process data stored in the process data storage means is data indicating execution of the specific operation processing;
  An abnormality determination unit during a period in which it is determined that the data is not the data indicating the execution of the specific operation process by the specific operation process determination unit and the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined by the determination period.
  The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that:

Images